chrysler powertrain
Short Description
chrysler powertrain applcaion...
Description
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Vetronix Corporation Copyright © 2006 Manual P/N 08002915 ® ® ® Tech 1 , Tech 1A , and Mastertech are registered trademarks of Vetronix Corporation Printed in USA 4/06
This entire document and all information contained herein are proprietary, confidential, and exclusive trade secret property of Vetronix Corporation, and shall not be reproduced, duplicated, or copied in whole or in part, or made available to any person, firm, or corporation without the prior written permission of Vetronix Vetronix Corporation.
Vetronix Corporation Copyright © 2006 Manual P/N 08002915 ® ® ® Tech 1 , Tech 1A , and Mastertech are registered trademarks of Vetronix Corporation Printed in USA 4/06
This entire document and all information contained herein are proprietary, confidential, and exclusive trade secret property of Vetronix Corporation, and shall not be reproduced, duplicated, or copied in whole or in part, or made available to any person, firm, or corporation without the prior written permission of Vetronix Vetronix Corporation.
Some Things You Should Know WARNING!
Exhaust Gas When performing any checks with the engine running in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation. Never inhale exhaust gases; they contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, extremely dangerous gas which can cause unconsciousness or death.
WARNING!
Avoiding Injury Always set the parking brake securely and block the drive wheels before performing any checks or repairs on the vehicle.
Important—Please Important—Please Read The Tech 1, Tech Tech 1A, and MTS 3100 are designed for use by t rained service personnel only. They have been developed for the sole purpose of diagnosing and repairing automotive electronic systems. With the help of the tester, the information presented in this manual and the appropriate automotive service manual, qualified personnel should be able to diagnose and repair electronic control systems.
Disclaimer Every attempt has been made to provide complete and accurate technical information based on factory service information available at the time of publication. However, the right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply wit h the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Using This Application with the MTS 3100 The MTS 3100 diagnoses OBD systems in a similar m anner as the Tech 1/Tech 1/Tech 1A but with the addition of data display enhancements. All tester adapters required to perform OBD system diagnostics are described in this operator's manual. Be sure to read the vehicle coverage tables tables for proper adapter configuration before connecting to the vehicle's diagnostic data link connector. When used alone in the MTS 3100, the operation of the cartridge and the vehicle identification screens, test menus, and data screens are as described in this manual. When this application is used with the MTS 3100 in conjunction with a program card, vehicle identification screens, test menus, diagnostic trouble codes, and diagnostic data parameters can be viewed in full-screen Enhanced Mode displays. Refer to the Enhanced Mode operating instructions in the program card operator's manual for further detail.
A Note about Tech 1 and Tech 1A Testers The Tech Tech 1 was originally introduced as an OEM scan tool in 1984. The Tech 1 Series A (Tech (Tech 1A) was released in 1989 and is an updated version of the Tech 1. After 19 years of successful distribution Vetronix decided to retire the Tech 1 and Tech Tech 1 A in 2003. This further established the MTS 3100’s foothold in the automotive service industr y. Please note that while every attempt has been made to ensure t he cartridge based software applications work on the Tech 1 and Tech 1A testers, Vetronix strongly recommends that Tech 1 and Tech 1A owners update to the MTS 3100 3100 tester. tester. Tech Tech 1 and Tech 1A 1A owners now qualify for special discounts on any MTS 3100 tester purchase. Please contact our customer support support department for program details: 800-321-4889 Ext 4.
Important—Please Read When you are using this manual to diagnose a vehicle, take the time to determine the type of tester that you are working with and be sure you are using the correct cables and adapters. Doing so may prevent misuse of application cartridges and incorrect vehicle diagnosis. Refer to Chapter 4 for complete information on the correct cables and adapters to use depending on which tester you have and the vehicle you are diagnosing.
Using This Manual Reading through this manual before putting your MTS 3100 to work introduces you to all of its capabilities and tell you how to use them immediately. The application software is designed to reduce time-consuming reference to manuals as much as possible. Once you are familiar with the software and its operation, you'll be able to spend more time diagnosing and less time reading. Later, if questions arise, a quick glance at the flow chart for the test you are performing is probably all you need. The flow charts in this manual consist of screen displays enclosed in boxes. The displays are arranged in the order in which they appear while using the software. Keys on the tester keypad are shown in the manual as white letters in small black boxes. At the end of each test mode description, there is a list of the active tester keys and their functions in that particular test. Note that if you are using the MTS 3100, the display l ooks different for vehicle selection and data list software. Otherwise, the diagnostic routines are the same Tech 1/1A displays as those shown in this manual. Refer to the MTS 3100 Operator’s Manual for examples of MTS 3100 displays.
X Most display screens require input from you, such as Y , N , or . To respond when the tester asks for information, press the appropriate key on the tester keypad. Alt hough there are exceptions, pressing generally takes you back to the previous screen or to the beginning of a process. generally X Please read Chapter 2 before 2 before beginning diagnostics for the first time.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 5
Table of Contents 1.
CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN APPLICATION DESCRIPTION . . . . . OPERATING MODES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 2
Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDR - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBD Controls - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBD Controls - Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Tests - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Tests - Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .
PRECAUTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
4 4 4
Protect Against Reverse Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protect Against Voltage Spikes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install/Remove Cartridges with Tester OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protect Snapshot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Tester Induced DTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 5 5 5 5 6
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS FOR CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN APPLICATION Connect Chrysler DLC Carefully
3.
6
.............................................
6
VEHICLE COVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEHICLE COVERAGE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1983-1984 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1985 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1986 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1990 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1990 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1992 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1992 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
7 7 7 9 11 13 15 15 17 17 19 19 21 21 22 22 23 23
TOC-i
1994 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1994 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2001 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2001 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2003 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004 Vehicle Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2004 Transmission Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING UP THE TESTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTS 3100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech 1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 33 35 36 37 38 40 40 42 42 44 44 46
47 48 48 49 50
POWERING UP THE TESTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
SELECTING THE APPLICATION
51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORM VEHICLE AND/OR SYSTEM SELECTION
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
Engine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Model Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Engine Type for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the EEC by Engine VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the EEC by Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Year 1989 and Later Engine Selection Engine Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPTER AND ADAPTER CABLE CONFIGURATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIO N NUMBER (VIN)
5.
24
53 53 53 53 54 54 55 56 58
. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
59
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
SELECTING AND OPERATING TEST MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
TEST MODES SUMMARY
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .
73
SELECTING TEST MODES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
MODE F0: DATA LIST
Viewing Data Parameters
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
TOC-ii
Create Your Own Data Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Custom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F1: CDR - ENGINE
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .
Read DTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDR Test Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F0: Sensor Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F1: Actuator Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F2: DTC Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F3: Engine Running Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F4: Clear DTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F2: DTCS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submode F0: Read DTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F1: Freeze Data - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F3: 1 Trip Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F4: Clear Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F3: SNAPSHOT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS - ENGINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submode F0: RPM Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F1: Actuator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F2: Reset Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F3: ASD Fuel System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F4: Minimum Airflow Idle Speed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F5: Fuel Injector Kill Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F6: Purge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F7: EGR Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F8: Base Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F9: More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS - TRANSMISSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submode F0: A/T Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F1: RPM Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F2: CVI Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F5: SYSTEM TESTS - ENGINE
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
Submode F0: Set Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F1: Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F2: LDP Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F2: NVLD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F5: SYSTEM TESTS - TRANSMISSION
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Submode F0: Quick Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F1: Pinion Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F2: TCC Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE F8: INFORMATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submode F3: ECU Info (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F3: ECU Info (Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submode F4: Vehicle Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
79 79 81 83 85 86 87 89 91 93 97 98 98 101 103 104 106 106 112 112 115 120 123 124 125 127 129 131 133 141 141 147 148 149 149 151 153 155 157 157 159 161 163 163 165 166
TOC-iii
6.
FINISHING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
A.
IF YOU’RE HAVING A PROBLEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
BLANK SCREEN
. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. .
SCREEN DISPLAYS SOLID BARS
169
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
TESTER DOES NOT RECOGNIZE APPLICATION CARTRIDGE OR CARTRIDGE IS 170 MALFUNCTIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
171
KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM INTERMITTENTLY RETURNS TO TITLE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
TESTER IS NOT RECEIVING DATA
172
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA LIST PARAMETERS FLASH ON AND OFF
B.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . CURRENT AND HISTORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES EEC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES ENGINE DTCS
173
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .
174
Model Years 1998 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EATX DTCS
198
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1997-2001 XJ AW4 TRANSMISSION DTCs
C.
191
. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. .
AISIN AW4 DTCS
204
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
ENGINE SYSTEM PARAMETERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS (EATX)
207
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .
229
D. CHRYSLER CONTROLLERS AND DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES WHAT IS ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS, PHASE II (OBD II)? WHY ADVANCED VEHICLE ELECTRONICS?
WHAT IS THE CCD DATA LINK?
239
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WHAT IS THE SAE J1850 DATA LINK?
. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . ..
OBD II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX ...........................................................................................
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
239
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WHAT IS THE SERIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE (SCI) DATA LINK?
E.
173
241 242 242 242
244
Index-248
TOC-iv
1. CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN APPLICATION DESCRIPTION
The Chrysler Powertrain application is used to diagnose and troubleshoot the Electronic Engine Control (EEC) systems used on 1983 through 2004 Chrysler vehicles. This application supports testing of Throttle Body Fuel Injection (TBI), Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI), Turbo-charged systems, as well as Feedback Carburetor (FBC) systems. A complete list of Chrysler engine types that can be tested with the Chrysler Powertrain application is given in Chapter 4. The tester guides you through engine type selection by questions, engine VIN code selection, or automatically by communicating with the EEC. The tester lets you monitor data and control EEC operation by communicating with the EEC via the Serial Com munication Interface (SCI) Diagnostic Connector present in the vehicle. When diagnosing electronic transmissions, the tester performs automatic identification of the EATX module and allows you to perform diagnostics. When using this application on 1995-2004 OBD II equipped vehicles, the tester displays diagnostic data parameters based on Chrysler SCI diagnostic data. The displayed diagnostic information i s in favor of the increased capability of Chrysler SCI diagnostic data, rather than the Generic OBD II diagnostic data list or operating modes. Additionally, on OBD II equipped vehicles, new emission related parameters (e.g., downstream O2S) and DTCs can be displayed. In addition, the Chrysler Powertrain application is used to diagnose and troubleshoot Chrysler Electronic Automatic Transmissions (EATX) on selected 1988 to 2004 Chrysler minivans, t rucks, and passenger cars. This application supports tests for the electronic transmissions that communicate on the Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) bus, the PCI Bus, and through the Powertrain Control Module. Transmission coverage is listed in tables in Chapter 4. Detailed operating instructions are given in this manual.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 1
Operating Modes
1. Chrysler Powertrain Application Description
OPERATING MODES The test modes available vary according to the specific configuration of the vehicle being tested and the system you wish to test. Before testing can begin, the tester asks you to enter certain inf ormation such as the model year, the type of vehicle being tested, the system you wish to test, and other specific information. How to enter the information is explained in Chapter 4. Once the information is entered, a Select Mode menu is displayed showing the test modes available for the selected vehicle. Only test modes available for the selected vehicle are displayed in the menus. Not all test modes described in this manual are available for every vehicle.
DATA LIST Displays Sensor and Input/Output data about the current condition of the system. Examples include Engine RPM, Purge Duty Cycle, and Fuel Status.
CDR - ENGINE Provides performance similar to Chrysler Diagnostic Readout Box such as reading DTCs, perform output controls, and display diagnostic data. This mode is not applicable to all vehicles.
DTCs Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded by the powertrain ECU. Freeze Frame information is available for applicable model years. The ability to Clear DTC information is also found in this mode.
SNAPSHOT Gives you the ability to capture Data List information for later analysis. Trigger point and trigger type are selectable by the user.
OBD CONTROLS - ENGINE Provides the ability for bi-directional control of a component or device on and off, reset memory values, or write to vehicle memory. Examples include actuator tests, reset cam/crank sync, fuel injector kill, and program VIN.
OBD CONTROLS - TRANSMISSION Provides the ability for bi-directional control of a component or device on and off. Examples include solenoid actuator tests.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 2
Operating Modes
1. Chrysler Powertrain Application Description
SYSTEM TESTS - ENGINE Allows you to perform diagnostic routines that return status information after the function has been performed. The results of the test/function is displayed to the user. Examples include Set Sync and LDP monitor test.
SYSTEM TESTS - TRANSMISSION Allows you to perform diagnostic routines that return status information after the function has been performed. The results of the test/function i s displayed to the user. Examples include Pinion Factor programming and Quick Learn procedure.
INFORMATION Displays helpful information about the vehicle or system under test. This information may consist of PCM software identification, monitor information, or system identification.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 3
2. OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
INTRODUCTION This chapter explains precautions that are very important when using Vetronix testers and application software with a vehicle. Failure to observe these precautions could affect the operation of the tester, the accuracy of data and tests, and at times your safety. Read all of this chapter before you operate the tester and application software (cartridges). Safeguards have been built into the tester to pr otect you, the vehicle, and the tester from any hazards. Misuse or improper securing of the vehicle could lead to unsafe conditions.
PRECAUTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS PROTECT AGAINST REVERSE POLARITY
CAUTION! CAUTION
If power is applied to the tester and the Tech 1A or Tech 1 display remains blank or the green LED on the MTS 3100 does not illuminate when turned off, reverse polarity in the cigarette lighter may be present. Damage to the tester could occur. DO NOT connect the ALDL/DLC cable to the vehicle. Verify that the center contact of the vehicl e’s cigarette lighter has +12 volts and that the outer contact is grounded.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 4
Precautions for All Applications
2. Operating Precautions
PROTECT AGAINST VOLTAGE SPIKES CAUTION! CAUTION
Due to the possibility of voltage spikes that could damage the vehicle or tester, do not connect or disconnect the tester while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running.
INSTALL/REMOVE CARTRIDGES WITH TESTER OFF Do not install or remove application or auxiliary cartridges while power is applied to the tester. To change or add a cartridge, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
CAUTION! CAUTION
2. Disconnect the tester power source—either the cigarette lighter power plug or the ALDL/DLC Cable—from the vehicle.
x 3. For the MTS 3100, press p to turn the tester OFF. 4. Change or install the cartridge(s). 5. Reconnect the tester power source—either the cigarette lighter power plug or the ALDL/DLC Cable. 6. Turn the ignition ON.
APPLY PARKING BRAKE OBD CONTROLS MODE OPERATION WARNING!
Use care when performing these tests. If used incorrectly, these test can result in personal injury or damage to the ECM, TCM, PCM, BCM, CTM, FCM, or CAB or vehicle. ALWAYS PUT THE PARKING BRAKE ON AND BLOCK THE WHEELS WHEN USING THIS TEST MODE.
PROTECT SNAPSHOT DATA CAUTION! CAUTION
Snapshot data is retained in tester memory for up to 24 hours, even if the tester is disconnected from the vehicle. If you remove or change master cartridges, or power up the tester without a master cartridge or with a different master cartridge, you will lose the snapshot data.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 5
Additional Precautions for Chrysler Powertrain Application
2. Operating Precautions
CHECK TESTER INDUCED DTCs
CAUTION!
Under some conditions the tester can cause trouble codes to be set. Generally these codes are associated with the serial data link. It is important to determine if the trouble codes are set by the tester or are due to a true malfunction in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Check for trouble codes at the start and at the end of testing. If there are codes set at the end of testing—but not at the start—you may assume that they are caused by the tester and should be cleared and ignored.
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS FOR CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN APPLICATION CONNECT CHRYSLER DLC CAREFULLY CAUTION! CAUTION
On some Chrysler vehicles the DLC is located near the battery. When connecting the Chrysler 6-pin adapter to the vehicle DLC, arrange the adapter so it cannot come in contact with the positive battery terminal, which could result in damage to the adapter and DLC cable and possibly create a fire hazard.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 6
3. VEHICLE COVERAGE
Use this section to assist you in operating your Vetronix tester and application software. It covers everything needed to get your tester connected to the vehicle and begin performing the diagnostic functions. It is suggested that you read this manual completely before operating the tester and the application software.
VEHICLE COVERAGE 1983-1984 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
E
2.2L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 7
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1983-1984 Select Engine Tree For 1983 and 1984, only TBI and TURBO models have diagnostic capability. Therefore, selections F2 and F4 are not available. 1983 models use the 1984 Select Engine Tree.
F0: VIN 1984 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
)
F1: TBI
F3: TURBO
1984 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
!
$ n
SELECT 8TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE: DE
1984 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=D TBI? 84 [YES/NO]
n SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=E TURBO? 84 [YES/NO]
Pressing @ or $ causes the following screen to appear: THIS SELECTION IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE CURRENT MODEL YEAR 3 SECONDS OR x
1984 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 8
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1985 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
A
1.6L L4
FBC
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
E
2.2L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
C
2.2L L4
FBC
CHRY-6
8
2.2L L4
FBC
CHRY-6
H
3.7L L6
FBC
CHRY-6
T
5.2L V8
FBC
CHRY-6
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 9
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1985 Select Engine Tree For 1985, only TBI, TURBO, and FBC models possess diagnostic capability. Therefore, selection F2 is not available. F0: VIN
F1: TBI
1985 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
)
F4: CARB
1985 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
!
1985 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
$ n
SELECT 8TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE: 8ACDEHT
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=D TBI? 85 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 1.6L 4-CYL VIN=A 2-BBL? 85 [YES/NO]
n
F3: TURBO 1985 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L L4 VIN=C,8 2-BBL? 85 [YES/NO]
#
n
n
SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=E TURBO? 85 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 3.7L 6-CYL VIN=H 1-BBL? 85 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT CARB ENG 5.2L V8 VIN=T 2-BBL? 85 [YES/NO]
n
Pressing @ causes the following screen to appear:
THIS SELECTION IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE CURRENT MODEL YEAR 3 SECONDS OR x
1985 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 10
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1986 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
A
1.6L L4
FBC
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
E
2.2L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
C
2.2L L4
FBC
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
H
3.7L L6
FBC
CHRY-6
T
5.2L V8
FBC
CHRY-6
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 11
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1986 Select Engine Tree For 1986, only TBI, TURBO, and FBC models possess diagnostic capability. Therefore, selection F2 is not available.
F0: VIN
F1: TBI
1986 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
)
F4: CARB
1986 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
1986 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
!
SELECT 8TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE: ACDEHKT
$
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=D TBI? 86 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 1.6L 4-CYL VIN=A 2-BBL? 86 [YES/NO]
n
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.5L 4-CYL VIN=K TBI? 86 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C VIN 5 = M,Z? 86 [YES/NO]
n
F3: TURBO 1986 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C VIN 5 = OTHER? 86 [YES/NO]
n n SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=E TURBO? 86 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 3.7L 6-CYL VIN=H 1-BBL? 86 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT CARB ENG 5.2L V8 VIN=T 2-BBL? 86 [YES/NO]
n
Pressing @ causes the following screen to appear:
THIS SELECTION IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE CURRENT MODEL YEAR 3 SECONDS OR x
1986 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 12
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1987 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS C
2.2L L4a
FBC
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
8
2.2L L4
FBC HO
CHRY-6
E
2.2L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
A
2.2L L4
TURBO II
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI (PASS. CAR)
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MFI (MMC)
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS K
2.5L L4
TBI (MINIVAN)
CHRY-6
H
3.7L L6
FBC
CHRY-6
M
3.9L V6
FBC
CHRY-6
T
5.2L V8
FBC
CHRY-6
a. Also used in the Dakota, Voyager, Ram Van, and Caravan.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 13
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1987 Select Engine Tree
F0: VIN
F2: MFI
1987 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
F4: CARB
1987 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
)
1987 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
@
$ n
SELECT 8TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE: 38ACDEHKMT
SELECT MFI ENG 3.0L V6 VIN=3 MFI? 87 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C VIN 5 = M,Z? 87 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C VIN 5 = OTHER? 87 [YES/NO]
n
F1: TBI
F3: TURBO
1987 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
1987 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
!
#
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=D TBI? 87 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=E TURBO? 87 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT CARB ENG 3.7L 6-CYL VIN=H 1-BBL? 87 [YES/NO]
n
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.5L 4-CYL VIN=K PASSENGER CAR? 87 [YES/NO]
SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=A TURBO II? 87 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.5L 4-CYL VIN=K MINIVAN? 87 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=8 2-BBL H.O.? 87 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT CARB ENG 3.9L V6 VIN=M 2-BBL? 87 [YES/NO]
n
n
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
SELECT CARB ENG 5.2L V8 VIN=T 2-BBL? 87 [YES/NO]
n
Page 14
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1988 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS A
2.2L L4
TURBO II
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
E
2.2L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MFI (MMC)
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS C
2.2L L4
FBC
CHRY-6
X
3.9L V6
TBI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
TBI
CHRY-6
1988 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 15
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1988 Select Engine Tree
F0: VIN
F1: TBI
1988 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
)
F3: TURBO
1988 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
1988 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
!
SELECT 8TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE: 3ACDEKXY
#
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=D TBI? 88 [YES/NO]
SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=E TURBO? 88 [YES/NO]
n
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 2.5L 4-CYL VIN=K TBI? 88 [YES/NO]
SELECT TURBO ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=A TURBO II? 88 [YES/NO]
n
F2: MFI
F4: CARB
1988 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
@ n
SELECT MFI ENG 3.0L V6 VIN=3 MFI? 88 [YES/NO]
SELECT TBI ENGINE 3.9L V6 VIN=X 4-SPD AUTOMATIC? 88 [YES/NO]
1988 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
$
n
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 3.9L V6 VIN=X OTHER TRANS.? 88 [YES/NO]
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C 2-BBL? 88 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 5.2L V8 VIN=Y 4-SPD AUTOMATIC? 88 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT TBI ENGINE 5.2L V8 VIN=Y OTHER TRANS.? 88 [YES/NO]
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
n
Page 16
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1989 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS A
2.2L L4a
TURBO II
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
J
2.5L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MFI (MMC)
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS AND MINIVANS G, K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MFI (MMC)
CHRY-6
X
3.9L V6
TBI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
TBI
CHRY-6
Z
5.9L V8
TBI
CHRY-6
a. Carryover 1988 system.
1989 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 17
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1989 Select Engine Tree
CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN 1983-2004 vX.X [ENTER]
SELECT SYSTEM F0: ENGINE F1: TRANSMISSION
)
SELECT MODEL YEAR 1989 (K) YY [ENTER]
E
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? 89
(YES/NO)
y
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? SMEC 5234XXX? 89 (YES/NO)
y
For 1989 and later models (except 89 2.2L Turbo II), the tester communicates with the EEC and then displays the engine size, type, VIN and year model for your confirmation. y
n
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? SMEC 5235XXX? 89 (YES/NO)
y
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
d
n u
n
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? MEX TURBO II? 89 (YES/NO)
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
y
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
d u SELECT MODE F3: SNAPSHOT
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 18
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1990 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
J
2.5L L4
TURBO I
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MMC
CHRY-6
C
2.2L L4
TURBO IV
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
DIS
CHRY-6
TBI
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS G, K
2.5L L4
MINIVANS K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
J
2.5L L4
TURBO I
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
DIS
CHRY-6
VANS AND TRUCKS X
3.9L V6
EFI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
EFI
CHRY-6
Z
5.9L V8
EFI
CHRY-6
1990 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 19
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1990 and Later Select Engine Tree
CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN 1983-2004 vX.X [ENTER]
e
SELECT SYSTEM F0: ENGINE F1: TRANSMISSION
)
TESTER COMMUNICATES WITH EEC, THEN DISPLAYS ENGINE SIZE, TYPE, VIN AND YEAR MODEL FOR YOUR CONFIRMATION
y
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT u
d
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 20
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1991 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
A
2.2L
TURBO III
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
J
2.5L L4
TURBO I
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
DIS
CHRY-6
L
3.8L V6
DIS
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS G, K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
X
3.9L V6
EFI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
EFI
CHRY-6
Z
5.9L V8
EFI
CHRY-6
C
5.9L I6
DIESEL
CHRY-6
MINIVANS K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
J
2.5L L4
TURBO I
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
DIS
CHRY-6
JEEP TRUCK P
2.5L L4
MPI
CHRY-6
S
4.0L L6
MPI
CHRY-6
1991 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 21
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1992 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS A
2.2L L4
TURBO
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
J
2.5L L4
TURBO I
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
U
3.0L V6
MPI (PRV)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
L
3.8L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
E
8.0L V10
MPI
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS K
2.5L L4
TBI-LP
CHRY-6
G
2.5L L4
TBI-HP
CHRY-6
X
3.9L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
MPI
CHRY-6
Z/5
5.9L V8
MPI (LD & HD)
CHRY-6
C
5.9L I6
DIESEL
CHRY-6
MINIVANS K
2.5L L4
TBI-LP
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
JEEP TRUCK P
2.5L L4
MPI
CHRY-6
S
4.0L L6
MPI
CHRY-6
1992 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 22
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1993 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS A
2.2L L4
Turbo III
CHRY-6
D
2.2L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
F
2.5L L4
Flex Fuel
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
T
3.3L V6
MPI
CHRY-C
F
3.5L V6
MPI
CHRY-C
L
3.8L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
E
8.0L V10
MPI
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS K
2.5L L4
TBI-LP
CHRY-6
G
2.5L L4
TBI-HP
CHRY-6
X
3.9L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
MPI
CHRY-6
T
5.2L V8
MPI-CNG
CHRY-6
Z/5
5.9L V8
MPI (LD & HD)
CHRY-6
C
5.9L I6
Diesel
CHRY-6
MINIVANS K
2.5L L4
TBI-LP
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
MPI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
JEEP TRUCK P
2.5L L4
MPI
CHRY-6
S
4.0L L6
MPI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
MPI
CHRY-6
1993 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
42LE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 23
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1994 VEHICLE COVERAGE 8TH VIN CODE
ENGINE SIZE AND TYPE
FUEL SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS D
2.2L L4
TBI-HP
CHRY-6
K
2.5L L4
TBI-HP
CHRY-6
V
2.5L L4
MPI-FFV
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
SFI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
SFI-DIS
CHRY-6
T
3.3L V6
SFI-DIS
CHRY-C
U
3.3L V6
SFI-FFV
CHRY-C
F
3.5L V6
SFI-DIS
CHRY-C
L
3.8L V6
SFI-DIS
CHRY-6
E
8.0L V10
SFI-DIC/VIC
CHRY-6
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS G
2.5L L4
TBI
CHRY-6
X
3.9L V6
MPI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
MPI
CHRY-6
T
5.2L V8
MPI-CNG
CHRY-6
Z/5
5.9L V8
MPI (LD & HD)
CHRY-6
C
5.9L I6
DIESEL
CHRY-6
W
8.0L V10
MPI
CHRY-6
MINIVANS K
2.5L L4
TBI-HP
CHRY-6
3
3.0L V6
SFI (MMC)
CHRY-6
R
3.3L V6
SFI-DIS
CHRY-6
J
3.3L V6
CNG-DIS
CHRY-6
L
3.8L V6
SFI-DIS
CHRY-6
JEEP TRUCK M
2.5L L4
DIESEL
CHRY-6
P
2.5L L4
SFI
CHRY-6
S
4.0L L6
SFI
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L V8
SFI
CHRY-6
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 24
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1994 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C
42LE
CCD
CHRY-C
1995 VEHICLE COVERAGE MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Lebaron LE, Spirit, Acclaim
AA
K
2.5L
TBI I4
SBEC II
CHRY-6
3
3.0L
SFI V6 (MMC)
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Lebaron
AJ
3
3.0L
SFI V6 (MMC)
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Neon
PL
C,N
2.0L
SFI I4 16V SOHC w/DIS
FCC
CHRY-16
Y
2.0L
SFI I4 16V DOHC w/DIS
FCC
CHRY-16
Viper
SR
E
8.0L
SFI V10 w/DIS & VIC
JTEC
CHRY-6
Cirrus, Stratus
JA
C
2.0L
SFI I4 w/DIS (M/T only)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI I4 DOHC w/ DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI V6 w/DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
T
3.3L
SFI V6 w/DIS
SBEC II
CHRY-C
F
3.5L
SFI V6 w/DIS
SBEC II
CHRY-C
Concorde, Intrepid,Vision, New Yorker, LHS
LH
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van
Dakota
Ram Truck
AB
AN
BR
X
3.9L
SFI V6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
T
5.2L
CNG V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L
SFI V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Z,5
5.9L
SFI V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
G
2.5L
TBI I4 (LPTBI)
SBEC I
CHRY-6
X
3.9L
SFI V6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L
SFI V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
X
3.9L
SFI V6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L
SFI V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Z,5
5.9L
SFI V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
C
5.9L
DIESEL I6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
W
8.0L
MPI V10
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 25
Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
3. Vehicle Coverage
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
MINIVANS Town & Country, Caravan, Grand Caravan, Voyager, Grand Voyager
AS
Town & Country, Caravan, Grand Caravan, Voyager, Grand Voyager
NSa
K
2.5L
TBI I4 (HPTBI)
SBEC II
CHRY-6
3
3.0L
SFI V6 (MMC)
SBEC II
CHRY-6
R
3.3L
SFI w/DIS V6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
L
3.8L
SFI w/DIS V6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
J
3.3L
CNG w/DIS V6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
B
2.4L
SFI w/DIS I4 DOHC
SBEC III
CHRY-16
3
3.0L
SFI V6 (MMC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI w/DIS V6
SBEC III
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI w/DIS V6
SBEC III
CHRY-16
J
3.3L
CNG w/DIS V6
SBEC III
CHRY-16
JEEP TRUCK Jeep Cherokee
Jeep Wrangler Jeep Grand Cherokee
XJ
YJ ZJ
P,H
2.5L
SFI I4
SBEC II
CHRY-6
S,V
4.0L
SFI I6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
M
2.5L
DIESEL I4
SBEC II
CHRY-6
P,H
2.5L
SFI I4
SBEC II
CHRY-6
S,V
4.0L
SFI I6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
M
2.5L
DIESEL I4
SBEC II
CHRY-6
S,V
4.0L
SFI I6
SBEC II
CHRY-6
Y
5.2L
SFI V8
SBEC II
CHRY-6
a. The NS body minivan is a 1996 model.
1995 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-C/CHRY-16
42LE
CCD
CHRY-C
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 26
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1996 VEHICLE COVERAGE MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Neon
(Convertible) Sebring, Avenger Cirrus, Stratus, Breeze
PL
JX
JA
Concorde, Intrepid, New Yorker, Vision, LHS
LH
Viper
SR
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS (MEX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS (GCC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI (MMC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI (MMC)(BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
C,Y,N
2.0L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI-DIS (GCC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
T,R
3.3L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
F
3.5L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
F
3.5L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
F
3.5L
SFI-DIS (GCC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
E
8.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
E
8.0L
SFI (ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van
Dakota
Ram Truck
AB
AN
BR
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI (GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,5
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI (GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
SFI-CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
SFI (CNG)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI (GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
5
5.9L
SFI (HD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
C
5.9L
DIESEL
JTEC
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
MPI (FED/HD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
MPI (CAL/MD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 27
Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
3. Vehicle Coverage
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
MINIVANS Town& Country, Caravan, Grand Caravan, Voyager, Grand Voyager
NS/GS
B
2.4L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
3
3.0L
SFI (MMC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI-DIS (GCC)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
J
3.3L
CNG-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI-DIS (BUX)
SBEC III
CHRY-16
JEEP TRUCK Cherokee
Grand Cherokee
XJ
ZJ
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
LEADED (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
LEADED (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
UNLEAD (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
LEADED (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
UNLEAD (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
LEADED (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
UNLEAD (BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
1996 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
CCD
CHRY-16
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 28
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1997 VEHICLE COVERAGE MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Neon
Cirrus, Stratus, Breeze
Sebring (Convertible)
PL
JA
JX
C,Y
2.0L
SFI-DIS
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI-DIS(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI-DIS(GCC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI-DIS(MEX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
S
2.4L
TURBO(MEX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
T,R
3.3L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
F
3.5L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
F
3.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
F
3.5L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
Intrepid, Concorde, Vision, LHS, New Yorker
LH
Prowler
PR
F
3.5L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
Viper
SR
E
8.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
E
8.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van, Wagon
Dakota
Ram Truck
AB
AN
BR
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,5,7
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,5,7
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,5,7
5.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
5
5.9L
SFI(HD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
D
5.9L
DIESEL
JTEC
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
MPI(FED/HD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
MPI(CA/MD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 29
Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
3. Vehicle Coverage
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
MINIVANS Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
NS/GS
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
3
3.0L
SFI(MMC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(JAP)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
J
3.3L
CNG
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI(JAP)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
JEEP TRUCK Cherokee
Wrangler
Grand Cherokee
XJ
TJ
ZJ
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
LEADED(BUX)
JT JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
LEADED(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
LEADED(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
LEADED(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CN CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,5,7
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,5,7
5.9L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JT JTEC
CHRY-16
1997 TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
CCD
CHRY-16
AW4
CCD
CHRY-16 CHRY-16
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 30
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1998 VEHICLE COVERAGE MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Neon
Cirrus, Stratus, Breeze
Sebring (Convertible)
Intrepid, Concorde, 300m (1999)
PL
JA
JX
LH
A
1.8L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
C,Y,B
2.0L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
C,Y,B
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
S
2.4L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
C,Y,B
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
Prowler
PR
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
Viper
SR
E
8.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
E
8.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van, Wagon
Dakota
AB
AN
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16 CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CN CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,7
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CN CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SF S FI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 31
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Ram Truck
BR
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CN CNG
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC
CHRY-16
5
5.9L
SFI(HD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
D
5.9L
DIESEL
JTEC
CHRY-16
6
5.9L
DIESEL
Cummins
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
MPI(FED/HD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
MPI(CA/MD)
JTEC
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,7
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Durango
DN
MINIVANS Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
NS/GS
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
3
3.0L
SFI(MMC)
SBEC III+
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(FED FFV)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC IIIa
CHRY-16
JEEP TRUCK Cherokee
Grand Cherokee
Wrangler
XJ
ZJ
TJ
P
2.5L
SF SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
LEADED(BUX)
JT JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
LEADED(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SF S FI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
LEADED(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
LEADED(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
Z,7
5.9L
UNLEAD(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 32
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
1998 TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42LE
CCD
CHRY-16
AW4
CCD
CHRY-16 CHRY-16
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
1999 VEHICLE COVERAGE MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Neon
Cirrus, Stratus, Breeze
Sebring (convertible)
Concorde, LHS, 300M, Intrepid, Vision
PL
JA
JX
LH
A
1.8L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3+
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC3+
CHRY-16
C
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
C
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
S
2.4L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
C
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
Prowler
PR
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
Viper
SR
E
8.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
E
8.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 33
Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
3. Vehicle Coverage
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van, Wagon
Dakota
Ram Truck
Durango
AB
AN
BR
DN
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16 CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
SFI(CNG)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
2
5.2L
SFI(LPG)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z,5
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z,5
5.9L
SFI (CHDS)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z,5
5.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
6
5.9L
Diesel
Cummins
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI(GCC)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
MINIVANS Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
NS/GS
C
2.0L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
3
3.0L
SFI
SBEC3+
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
FFV
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI(GCC)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI(MEX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
JEEP TRUCK Wrangler
TJ
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 34
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Cherokee
XJ
P,H
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P,H
2.5L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S,V
4.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI(BUX)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI(ECE)
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Grand Cherokee
WJ
1999 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
45RFE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
AW4
CCD
CHRY-16
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 35
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2000 VEHICLE COVERAGE MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Neon Cirrus, Stratus, Breeze
PL JA
Sebring (convertible)
JX
Concorde, LHS, 300M, Intrepid
LH
A
1.8L
SFI(BUX)
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
C,Y
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
C
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
C
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
H
2.5L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
U
2.7L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
V
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
Prowler
PR
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
Viper
SR
E
8.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van, Wagon
Dakota
Ram Truck
Durango
AB
AN
BR
DN
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CNG
JTEC+
CHRY-16
2
5.2L
LPG
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
5
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
6
5.9L
Diesel
Cummins
CHRY-16
7
5.9L
Diesel HO
Cummins
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
MINIVANS Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
NS
B
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
3
3.0L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI
SBEC3A
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 36
Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
3. Vehicle Coverage
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
JEEP TRUCK Wrangler Cherokee Grand Cherokee
TJ XJ WJ
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
2000 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
CCD
CHRY-16
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
45RFE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
45RFE
CCD
CHRY-16 (AN,DN Body)
AW4
CCD
CHRY-16
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 37
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2001 VEHICLE COVERAGE
MODEL
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
PASSENGER CARS Neon
PL
C
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3B
CHRY-16
PT Cruiser
PT
9
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
B
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
C
2.0L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
X
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
S
2.4L Turbo
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
R
2.7L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
U
2.7L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
J
3.2L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
V
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
Sebring, Stratus
LHS, 300M, Intrepid, Concorde
JR
LH
Prowler
PR
G
3.5L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
Viper
SR
E
8.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 38
Vehicle Coverage
MODEL
3. Vehicle Coverage
BODY CODE
8TH VIN CODE
ENG SIZE
FUEL SYSTEM
PCM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
LIGHT TRUCKS AND VANS Ram Van, Wagon
Dakota
Ram Truck
Durango
AB
AN
BR
DN
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
T
5.2L
CNG
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
X
3.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
5
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
6
5.9L
Diesel
Cummins
CHRY-16
7
5.9L
Diesel HO
Cummins
CHRY-16
W
8.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
MINIVANS Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
RS
B
2.4L
SFI
SBEC3A+
CHRY-16
G
3.3L FFV
SFI
SBEC3B
CHRY-16
R
3.3L
SFI
SBEC3B
CHRY-16
L
3.8L
SFI
SBEC3B
CHRY-16
JEEP TRUCK Wrangler
TJ
P
2.5L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Cherokee
XJ
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Grand Cherokee
WJ
S
4.0L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
N
4.7L
SFI
JTEC+
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 39
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2001 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42LE
CCD
CHRY-16
45RFE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
AW4
CCD
CHRY-16
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
2002 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2002 CHRYSLER/DODGE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Intrepid, Concorde, 300M
D, E, H
R
2.7L V6 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
G, K, M, V
3.5L V6 SOHC MPI
Neon
S, V
P
1.6L I4 SOHC MPI
SBEC3B
SCI
CHRY-16
C, F
2.0L I4 SOHC MPI
Y
2.0L I4 DOHC MPI
SBEC3A
SCI
CHRY-16
S
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
R
2.7L V6 DOHC MPI
9
2.0L I4 DOHC MPI
SBEC3A+
SCI
CHRY-16
B
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
MODEL
Sebring, Stratus
PT Cruiser
J, L
Y
Viper
R
E
8.0L V10 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Prowler
W
G
3.5L V6 MPI
SBEC3A+
SCI
CHRY-16
2002 CHRYSLER/DODGE MINIVANS MODEL
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
P, T, J, Y, C, H, K
B
2.4L I4 MPI
SBEC3A+
SCI
CHRY-16
R
3.3L V6 MPI
SBEC3B
SCI
CHRY-16
3
3.3L V6 FFV
SBEC3B
SCI
CHRY-16
L
3.8L V6 MPI
SBEC3B
SCI
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 40
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2002 DODGE LIGHT TRUCKS/VANS MODEL Ram Van/ Wagon
Ram Truck 1500
Ram Truck 2500/3500
Dakota
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
B
X
3.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
T
5.2L V8 CNG
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
K
3.7L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI-LDC
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI-LDC
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
5
5.9L V8 MPI-HDC
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
6
5.9L Diesel
Cummins
SCI
CHRY-16
7
5.9L Diesel HO
Cummins
SCI
CHRY-16
W
8.0L V10 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
P
2.5L I4 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
X
3.9L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
A, U
C, F
G, L
NGC I
Durango
R, S
Z
5.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
SCI
CHRY-16
NGC I Z
5.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
MODEL
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Wrangler
A, 4
P
2.5L I4 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
S
4.0L I6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
S
4.0L I6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
J
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
1
2.4L I4 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
K
3.7L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
2002 JEEP TRUCKS
Grand Cherokee
Liberty
X, W
K, L, M
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 41
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2002 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
45RFE/545RFE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
4xRE
SCI
CHRY-16
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
2003 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2003 CHRYSLER/DODGE PASSENGER CARS MODEL
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Sebring, Stratus
J, L
R
2.7L V6 DOHC MPI
SBEC3A
SCI
CHRY-16
T
2.7L V6 FFV
SBEC3A
SCI
CHRY-16
X
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
Y
2.0L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
Viper
R
Z
8.3L V10 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Intrepid, Concorde, 300M
D, E, H
R
2.7L V6 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
G, K, M, V
3.5L V6 SOHC MPI
PT Cruiser
Y, E, Z
9
2.0L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
B
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
G
2.4L Turbo I4 MPI
F
2.0L HO I4 SOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
C
2.0L I4 SOHC MPI
S
2.4L Turbo I4 DOHC MPI
Neon
S, V
2003 CHRYSLER/DODGE MINIVANS MODEL Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
P, T, J, Y, C, H K
B
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
R
3.3L V6 MPI
SBEC3B
SCI
CHRY-16
3
3.3L V6 FFV
L
3.8L V6 MPI
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 42
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2003 DODGE LIGHT TRUCKS/VANS MODEL Ram Van/ Wagon
Ram Truck 1500/2500/ 3500
Dakota
Durango
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
B
A, U
G, L
R, S
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTE R CONFIG.
X
3.9L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Y
5.2L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
T
5.2L V8 CNG
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
K
3.7L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
D
5.7L V8 MPI
NGC II
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI-LDC
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
6
5.9L Diesel
Cummins
SCI
CHRY-16
7
5.9L Diesel HO
Cummins
SCI
CHRY-16
W
8.0L V10 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
X
3.9L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
Z
5.9L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
2003 JEEP TRUCKS MODEL
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Wrangler
A, 4
1
2.4L I4 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
S
4.0L I6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
S
4.0L I6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
J
4.7L HO V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
1
2.4L I4 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
K
3.7L V6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Grand Cherokee
Liberty
X, W
K, L, M
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 43
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2003 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
41TE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
45RFE/545RFE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42RLE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42RE
SCI
CHRY-16
46RE
SCI
CHRY-16
47RE
SCI
CHRY-16
2004 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2004 CHRYSLER/DODGE PASSENGER CARS MODEL
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Sebring, Stratus
J, L
Y
2.0L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
X
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC I/ NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
R
2.7L V6 DOHC MPI
SBEC3A/ NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
T
2.7L V6 FFV
SBEC3A/ NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
Viper
Z
Z
8.3L V10 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Intrepid, Concorde, 300M
D, E, H
R
2.7L V6 DOHC MPI
NGC I
SCI
CHRY-16
G, K, M, V
3.5L V6 SOHC MPI
PT Cruiser
Y, 2, 4
B
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
8
2.4L Turbo I4 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
F
2.0L HO I4 SOHC MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
Y
2.0L HO I4 DOHC MPI
C
2.0L I4 SOHC MPI
S
2.4L Turbo I4 DOHC MPI
4
3.5L V6 SOHC MPI
NGC I/ NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
Neon
Pacifica
S, V
M, F
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 44
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2004 CHRYSLER/DODGE MINIVANS MODEL Caravan, Voyager, Town & Country
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
1, P, T, J, Y, C, H K
B
2.4L I4 DOHC MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
R
3.3L V6 MPI
L
3.8L V6 MPI
2004 DODGE LIGHT TRUCKS/VANS MODEL Ram Truck 1500/2500/ 3500
Dakota
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
A, U
G, L
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTE R CONFIG.
K
3.7L V6 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
P
4.7L V8 FFV
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
D
5.7L V8 MPI
NGC II
SCI
CHRY-16
6
5.9L Diesel
Cummins
SCI
CHRY-16
7
5.9L Diesel HO
Cummins
SCI
CHRY-16
H
8.3L V10 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
K
3.7L V6 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
2004 JEEP TRUCKS MODEL
BODY VIN (5TH)
ENGINE VIN (8TH)
ENGINE
ECU TYPE
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
Wrangler
A, 4
1
2.4L I4 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
S
4.0L I6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
1
2.4L I4 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
K
3.7L V6 MPI
NGC III
SCI
CHRY-16
S
4.0L I6 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
N
4.7L V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
J
4.7L HO V8 MPI
JTEC+K
SCI
CHRY-16
Liberty
Grand Cherokee
K, L, M
X, W
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 45
Vehicle Coverage
3. Vehicle Coverage
2004 TRANSMISSION COVERAGE MODEL
DATA LINK
ADAPTER CONFIG.
40TE/41TE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
45RFE/545RFE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42LE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42RLE
PCI BUS
CHRY-16/OBD II/OBD II-C
42RE
SCI
CHRY-16
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 46
4. GETTING STARTED
This chapter provides information to assist you i n operating your Vetronix tester and software application. In addition to helping you identify vehicles covered by the software, it shows you how to connect your tester to the vehicle and explains how to begin performing system diagnostic functions. It is suggested that you read this manual completely before operating the tester and the system software.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 47
Setting Up the Tester
4. Getting Started
SETTING UP THE TESTER MTS 3100 Before you operate the application software, do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF. 2. Connect the tester DLC (formerly called the ALDL) cable to the tester and tighten the screws. 3. Insert the cartridge into the slot at the top rear of the tester.
FIGURE 4-1. Inserting Cartridge into the MTS 3100
Application Cartridge or Mass Storage Cartridge (MSC)
MTS 3100
4. Install the appropriate adapter to the tester DLC cable. Refer to Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 59 for information on selecting the correct adapters. 5. Connect the adapter cable to the to the vehicle connector. Continue to Powering Up the Tester on page 51.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 48
Setting Up the Tester
4. Getting Started
TECH 1A Before you operate the Tech 1A, do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF. 2. Connect the tester DLC (formerly called the ALDL) cable to the tester and tighten the screws. 3. Insert the application into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom, rear of t he tester. Verify that no other “Master” cartridge is installed in the tester.
FIGURE 4-2. Inserting Cartridge into the Tech 1A
Tech 1A
Application Cartridge or Mass Storage Cartridge (MSC)
4. If the system being tested uses PCI Bus data link, technicians using a Tech 1A tester must also insert the OBD II Interface Cartridge into the top slot of the Tech 1A. 5. Install the appropriate adapter to the tester DLC cable. Refer to Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 59 for information on selecting the correct adapters. 6. Connect the adapter cable to the to the vehicle connector. Continue to Powering Up the Tester on page 51.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 49
Setting Up the Tester
4. Getting Started
TECH 1 Before you operate the Tech 1, do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF. 2. Connect the tester DLC (formerly called the ALDL) cable to the tester and tighten the screws. 3. Insert the application into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom, rear of t he tester. Verify that no other “Master” cartridge is installed in the tester.
FIGURE 4-3. Inserting Cartridge into the Tech 1
Tech 1
Application Cartridge or Mass Storage Cartridge (MSC)
4. Connect the appropriate adapter, adapter cable, and/or VIM to the DLC Cable. Refer to Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 59 for information on selecting the correct adapters. 5. Connect the adapter cable to the vehicle connector. Continue to Powering Up the Tester .
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 50
Powering Up the Tester
4. Getting Started
POWERING UP THE TESTER Plug the DC power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter or connect the optional battery adapter cable to the battery, then plug the power cable i nto the adapter. Continue to Selecting the Application.
NOTE
Some Chrysler OBD II vehicles may not provide power through the J1962 connector due to a blown fuse. In these cases, power to the tester can be supplied via the DC power cable.
SELECTING THE APPLICATION 1. A Power-up display similar to those shown below appears: Vetronix Corp. High Capacity 16MB MSC (c) 2004 vX.X [ENTER]
Vetronix Corp. Chrysler Diagnostics (c) 2004 vX.X
16MB Mass Storage Cartridge (MSC)
Chrysler Diagnostic Cartridge)
2. Press u or wait two seconds to proceed to the Applications menu screen. If the display is not correct, refer to Appendix A. The available software applications are displayed: APPLICATIONS ↑↓ → CHRYSLER P/T CHRYSLER CHASSIS CHRYSLER BODY
3. Select the Application. If your Application is on a MSC, use the u and d to move the cursor. If the Application is on a MAC, select the function key next to the desired application. 4. If data from a previously tested vehicle is stored in the tester memory, press # to go to the previous software application. 5. The Chrysler Powertrain identification screen is displayed. See Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection on page 53 for vehicle and system selection. .
CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN 1983 - 2004 V3.0 [ENTER]
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 51
Selecting the Application
4. Getting Started
6. If the display is correct, turn the ignition ON and you are ready to proceed with selecting the vehicle model year. Continue to Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection. If the display reads:
MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING
The tester is receiving power but the cartridge is not making good contact, or else the wrong DLC cable and/or adapter are installed. If this happens, do the following: •
Remove and reinsert the cartridge making sure that the cartridge is properly seated.
•
Verify that the correct DLC cable is installed.
•
See Step 4 to determine if the vehicle you are testing requires a DLC cable adapter. If an adapter is required, verify that the correct one is installed.
If the display is blank, the tester is not receiving power. In this case, perform the following checks: •
Disconnect and reconnect the tester DC power plug at the cigarette lighter socket.
•
Make sure that both the tester DC power plug and cigarette lighter socket have good, clean contacts.
•
Verify that 12V power is available at the center contact of the cigarette lighter socket, and that the outside contact of the lighter socket is grounded.
•
Check the vehicle's cigarette lighter fuse.
•
Check the fuse in the cigarette lighter plug on the end of the tester DC power cable.
If the display is still not correct, Appendix A lists possible causes for the malfunction and recommendations to remedy the problem. If the problem persists, perform the tester Self-test as described in the basic tester Operator's Manual.
NOTE The tester Self-test does not operate with the application cartridge installed.
ACTIVE KEYS e
Confirm displayed information is correct. Advance to next display. Select previously tested vehicle.
u , d
Used to select a menu item. Stop automatic menu scroll. Manually scroll menu.
x
Return to previous display.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 52
Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection
4. Getting Started
PERFORM VEHICLE AND/OR SYSTEM SELECTION ENGINE SYSTEMS Since not all tests are available for all years and all models, the display screen varies according to the vehicle under diagnosis. Only tests applicable to the particular vehicle are displayed. For instance, most 1989 and later models do not support CDR mode, so F1: CDR is not displayed on the test selection menu. If you are testing 1983-1988 models, you can identi fy the engine type either by VIN code or fuel system by making selections according to the vehicle under test. The engine identification process is the same f or each 1983-1988 model year, but the tester display questions are slightly different because each model year has different engine types. To make selections, press N until the correct information is displayed, then press the Y key. After the correct engine type has been identified, diagnosis may begin. Some vehicles that are pre-1989 require the engine to be running in order to run diagnostics. For model years 1989 and later, Chrysler vehicles have the ability to automatically identify the engine type after the system selection. Because the tester needs to communicate with the EEC for identification, MAKE SURE THE IGNITION IS ON WHEN SELECTING ENGINE SYSTEM. If engine type identification is correct, press Y and diagnosis may begin.
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM After selection of transmission system, the tester automatically identifies the transmission module for model years 1988 and later. Because the tester needs to communicate with the transmission ECU for identification, MAKE SURE THE IGNITION IS ON WHEN SELECTING THE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM. For model years 1996 and later, most Rear Wheel Drive vehicles that have a 4-speed electronically controlled automatic transmission (4xRE) support diagnostics through the engine controller. Transmission data parameters and output tests are embedded in the engine data list and engine output control list. F0: ENGINE must be selected to diagnose these transmissions.
SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR For 1983-88 vehicles, the tester asks you to select the model year of the vehicle being t ested. Do so by using the u and d keys to scroll through the model years and then pressing e at the desired model year. Depending on the year selected, one of the two displays shown in Figure 4-4 appears.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 53
Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-4. Selecting Model Year
SELECT MODEL YEAR 2000 (Y) YY [ENTER] 1983-1988
1989
198x SELECT F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II?
1983-1988
1989 2.2L Turbo II
89
[YES/NO]
SELECTING THE ENGINE TYPE FOR TESTING When the model year has been selected, the tester asks you to select the engine type. As shown in Figure 44, the engine type selection method depends on vehicle model year. 1983-88 models can select the engine type either by VIN code or fuel system as described below. For 1989 and later models, the vehicle is automatically identified by the tester.
Model Year 1983-1988 Engine Selection To help you select the engine type as quickly as possible, the tester displays an ENGINE SELECTION menu immediately after selecting model years 1983-1988. Press ) to choose the engine VIN code select method, or press ! - $ to choose the corresponding Fuel System select method.
SELECTING THE EEC BY ENGINE VIN CODE The cartridge allows you to select the engine VIN code directly. The 8th digit of the VIN is the engine VIN code. If the engine VIN code select method has been chosen, the tester displays every engine VIN code available for the selected model year. To select a given VIN code simply press N until the desired VIN code is flashing, then press Y to select the flashing VIN code. The tester displays a select message describing the engine corresponding to the selected VIN. If the engine and vehicle type select message is correct, press Y again and the test selection menu becomes active. In some cases a given VIN code applies to more than one engine or vehicle type. In this case, if the select message does not correspond to the vehicle being tested, press N until the appropriate message is displayed, then press Y (see Figure 4-5).
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 54
Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-5. Selecting by VIN Code n
SELECT VIN K ENG 2.5L 4-CYL TBI PASSENGER CAR? 87 [YES/NO]
n
SELECT VIN K ENG 2.5L 4-CYL TBI MINIVAN? 87 [YES/NO]
y
y
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
If none of the select messages correspond to the vehicle, recheck the VIN code (8th digit).
SELECTING THE EEC BY FUEL SYSTEM After selecting a 1983-1988 model from the power-up display, press ! - $ to select the fuel system type for the vehicle being tested. Engines with the same fuel system type that you have selected are displayed one at a time, beginning with the engine with the smallest displacement. Press the N key until the correct engine size and type for the vehicle being tested are displayed, then press the Y key. The test mode selection menu is displayed (see Chapter 5). For some model years, there are engines of the same size and with the same engine VIN number that must be distinguished by looking at the 5th character (car line/series) i n the VIN code (see Figure 4-6).
FIGURE 4-6. Selecting by Fuel System 1987 SELECT: F0: VIN F3: TURBO F1: TBI F4: CARB F2: MFI
$
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C VIN 5 = M,Z? 87 [YES/NO]
Engine VIN (8th Char.) = C Car Line/Series VIN (5th char.) = M or Z.
n
SELECT CARB ENG 2.2L 4-CYL VIN=C VIN 5 = OTHER? 87 [YES/NO]
Engine VIN (8th Char.) = C Car Line/Series VIN (5th char.) = Letter or number other than M or Z.
n
OTHER CARB ENGINES
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 55
Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection
4. Getting Started
The engine selection process is the same for each 1983-1988 model year, but the tester display questions are slightly different because each model year has different engine types. The series of display questions make up an Engine Select Tree. Refer to the following pages for complete Select Tree diagrams showing exactly how to select each engine type in each model year.
MODEL YEAR 1989 AND LATER ENGINE SELECTION ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1989 and later Chrysler vehicles possess a significant number of diagnostic functions, including the ability to transmit vehicle identification information to the tester. Because the tester needs to communicate with these EECs during engine selection, make sure the ignition is ON when selecting model year 1989 or later.
1989 Turbo II The 1989 Turbo II does not have the automatic engine selection capability (or other 1989 diagnostic functions) because it is actually a carr y-over 1988 system. Because of this, after you select model year 1989, the screen displays the following:
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2.L TURBO II? 89
[YES/NO]
If you are testing a 1989 2.2L Turbo II model, press Y in response to this display. You are then asked to select the specific TURBO II system. Press N until the correct SMEC number is displayed, then press Y . The SMEC number (Single Module El ectronic Controller) can be found on the SMEC unit under the hood. If you are only using F1: CDR or F2: DTCs, it doesn’t matter which SMEC is selected. To perform F0: DATA LIST or F3: SNAPSHOT, the correct SMEC must be selected. If the SMEC label is missing, there are some steps to help you determine which SMEC you are testing. First, select either of the SMEC options displayed on the display screen, then start the engine and let it idle. Check the engine idle speed as described in F0: DATA LIST mode. The displayed idle speed reading should be correlated to the actual engine speed. If it is, you’ve selected the correct SMEC for the vehicle being tested. If the idle speed reading does not appear to be the actual engine speed (much higher or lower), press X , select the other SMEC option, then perform the idle test again.
ALL 1989 and LATER MODELS (EXCEPT 1989 2.2L TURBO II) Selecting Engine from the system menu causes the tester to automatically communicate with the EEC to determine the engine type and display it for your acknowledgment. If the engine type displayed does not X match the engine you are testing, press and reselect the model year. If the engine matches the vehicle you are testing, press Y to move to the test mode selection menu and begin diagnosis. If the display on the tester does not match the vehicle you are testing, confirm that the correct controller is installed in the vehicle. The tester displays the test mode selection menu, as shown in Figure 4-7. Since not all tests are available for all years and all models, the display screen varies according to the model selected. Only tests applicable to the particular vehicle selected are displayed. For instance, most 1989 and later models do not support CDR mode, so F1: CDR is not displayed on the test selection menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 56
Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-7. Example of 1989 and Later Engine Selection Process
CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN 1983-2004 vX.X [ENTER]
SELECT SYSTEM F0: ENGINE F1: TRANSMISSION
)
SELECT MODEL YEAR 1989 (K) YY [ENTER]
E
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? 89
(YES/NO)
For 1989 and later models (except 89 2.2L Turbo II), the tester automatically displays the engine size, type, VIN and year model.
y
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? SMEC 5234XXX? 89 (YES/NO)
y
y
n
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? SMEC 5235XXX? 89 (YES/NO)
y
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
d
n u
n
SELECT VIN A ENG 2.2L TURBO II? MEX TURBO II? 89 (YES/NO)
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
y
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
d u SELECT MODE F3: SNAPSHOT
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 57
Perform Vehicle and/or System Selection
4. Getting Started
When you power up the tester, the CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN message is displayed. You then need to select the system that you want to test. The tester then asks you to choose F0: ENGINE or F1: TRANSMISSION. The tester then asks you for more information depending on the selection of engine/ transmission system.
TRANSMISSION SELECTION To begin Chrysler Electronic Automatic Transmission (EATX) diagnosis on the 41TE, 42LE, 42RLE, AW4 (Aisin), or 45RFE/545RFE, press F1: TRANSMISSION at the SELECT SYSTEM prompt. The tester automatically establishes communications with the Transmission Control Module and displays the identification informat ion screen. You are now ready to begin transmission diagnostics. For model years 1996 and later, most Rear Wheel Drive vehicles that have a 4-speed electronically controlled automatic transmission (4xRE) support diagnostics through the engine controller. Transmission data parameters and output tests are embedded in the engine data list and engine output control list. F0: ENGINE must be selected to diagnose these transmissions.
FIGURE 4-8. Example of EATX Selection Process CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN 1983-2004 vX.X [ENTER]
SELECT SYSTEM F0: ENGINE F1: TRANSMISSION
!
41TE TRANS S/W VER - X X.XL XXX TCM PN#: XXXXXXX
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F4: OBD CONTROLS
D u SELECT MODE F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
ACTIVE KEYS 0 - 9
Select Model Year of the vehicle being tested.
- $ !
Select fuel system type or VIN.
N
Used to move the cursor ( flashing VIN code).
, N Y
Used to choose specific VIN code or engine.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 58
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
ADAPTER AND ADAPTER CABLE CONFIGURATIONS CHRYSLER SYSTEM
ADAPTER CONFIG.
TESTER
Engine/Transmission: 1983-1995 all (except LH, JA, PL body)
CHRY-6
MTS 3100
Engine: 1993-1995 LH Body Transmission: 19881995 41TE 1993-1995 42LE
CHRY-C
Engine: 1995 JA, PL Body 1996-2004 All Transmission: 1996-2004 40TE/41TE 1996-2004 42LE 1996-2004 4xRE 1997-2001 AW4 1999-2004 45RFE/ 545RFE
CHRY-16
Transmission: 1995-2004 41TE Sebring, Avenger, Talon
CHRY-Y
Transmission: 2001-2004 40TE/41TE 1998-2004 42LE 1999-2004 45RFE/ 545RFE 2003-2004 42RLE
ADAPTER DESCRIPTION
REFER TO:
6/14 pin SCI DLC adapter (P/N 02002154)
Figure 4-9
Tech 1
6/12 pin SCI DLC adapter (P/N 02001242)
Figure 4-11
MTS 3100
Chrysler Engine/CCD Vehicle Interface Module (VIM) (P/N 02002192) and 6/24 pin CCD adapter cable (P/N 02001830)
Figure 4-12
Chrysler Engine/CCD Vehicle Interface Module (VIM) (P/N 02002192) and 16/ 24 pin CCD adapter cable (P/N 02001744 or 3000081)
Figure 4-14
MTS 3100c
Chrysler Engine/CCD Vehicle Interface Module (VIM) (P/N 02002192) and 6/24 pin CCD adapter cable (P/N 02001830) and 16 + 13/6 Chrysler OBD II “Y” adapter cable (P/N 02003332).
Figure 4-16
OBD II-C
MTS 3100
Controller Area Network Vehicle Interface Module (VIM) (P/N 02003211) and 16/24 pin DLC adapter cable (P/N 02001744)
Figure 4-17
OBD II
Tech 1A
OBD II Interface Cartridge (P/N 02002178) 16/14 pin Type 3 adapter cable (P/N 02001969)
Figure 4-18
OBD II VIM (P/N 02001808) 16/24 pin VIM adapter cable (P/N 02001744 or P/N 3000081)
Figure 4-19
OBD II VIM (P/N 02001808) 16/24 pin VIM adapter cable (P/N 02001744 or P/N 3000081) Tech 1 14/12 pin VIM DLC adapter (P/N 02001198)
Figure 4-20
Tech 1A
Tech 1A
MTS 3100a Tech 1A b
Tech 1
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-15
a. If your MTS 3100 is OBD II compliant, this configuration may also be used to satisfy the OBD II Adapter Configuration requirements. b. If your Tech 1A has an OBD II Interface Cartridge installed, this configuration may also be used to satisfy the OBD II Adapter Configuration requirements. c. If your MTS 3100 is OBD II compliant, this configuration may also be used to satisfy the OBD II Adapter Configuration requirements.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 59
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-9. CHRY-6 Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 Engine: 1983-1995 all (except LH, JA, PL body)
APPLICATION CARTRIDGE
MTS 3100
DLC CABLE
DC POWER CABLE
CHRYSLER 6/14 PIN SCI DLC ADAPTER
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 60
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-10. CHRY-6 Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A Engine: 1983-1995 all (except LH, JA, PL body)
DLC CABLE TECH 1A
DC POWER CABLE
MASTER CARTRIDGE
CHRYSLER 6/14 PIN SCI DLC ADAPTER
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 61
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-11. CHRY-6 Adapter Configuration for Tech 1
Engine: 1983-1995 all (except LH, JA, PL body)
TECH 1
TECH 1 DLC CABLE
MASTER CARTRIDGE
DC POWER CABLE
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
CHRYSLER 6/12 PIN SCI DLC ADAPTER
Page 62
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-12. CHRY-C Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100
Engine: 1993-1995 LH Body Transmission: 1988-1995 41TE, 1993-1995 42LE
APPLICATION CARTRIDGE
MTS 3100
DLC CABLE
CHRYSLER ENGINE/CCD VEHICLE INTERFACE MODULE (VIM)
CHRYSLER 6/24 PIN CCD ADAPTER CABLE
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 63
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-13. CHRY-C Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A
Engine: 1993-1995 LH Body Transmission: 1988-1995 41TE, 1993-1995 42LE
DLC CABLE TECH 1A
MASTER CARTRIDGE CHRYSLER ENGINE/CCD VEHICLE INTERFACE MODULE (VIM)
CHRYSLER 6/24 PIN CCD ADAPTER CABLE
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 64
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-14. CHRY-16 Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 Engine: 1995 JA, PL Body 1996-2004 All Transmission: 1996-2004 40TE/41TE 1996-2004 42LE 1996-2004 4xRE 1997-2001 AW4 1999-2004 45RFE/545RFE
APPLICATION CARTRIDGE
MTS 3100
DLC CABLE
CHRYSLER ENGINE/CCD VEHICLE INTERFACE MODULE (VIM)
16/24 PIN DLC ADAPTER CABLE
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 65
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-15. CHRY-16 Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A Engine: 1995 JA, PL Body 1996-2004 All Transmission: 1996-2004 40TE/41TE 1996-2004 42LE 1996-2004 4xRE 1997-2001 AW4 1999-2004 45RFE/545RFE
Tech 1A
Chrysler Engine/CCD Vehicle Interface Module (VIM)
16/24 Pin DLC Adapter Cable
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 66
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-16. Chrysler-Y Adapter Cable Configuration for MTS 3100
Hardware Setup The Chrysler-Y adapter cable is designed for EATX transmission diagnostics on the 1995-2004 Sebring, Stratus, Avenger, Talon vehicles that have a Mitsubishi engine.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 67
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-17. OBD II-C Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 Transmission: 2001-2004 40TE/41TE 1998-2004 42LE 2003-2004 42RLE 1999-2004 45RFE/545RFE Application Cartridge
OBD II Compliant MTS 3100 Tester
DLC Cable
Controller Area Network VIM
16/24 Pin DLC Adapter Cable (P/N 02001744)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 68
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-18. OBD II Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A
Transmission: 2001-2004 40TE/41TE 1998-2004 42LE 2003-2004 42RLE 1999-2004 45RFE/545RFE
OBD II Interface Cartridge (P/N 02002178) DLC Cable
TECH 1A
16/14 Pin OBD II Adapter Cable (P/N 02001969) Application Cartridge
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 69
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-19. OBD II Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A
Transmission: 2001-2004 40TE/41TE 1998-2004 42LE 2003-2004 42RLE 1999-2004 45RFE/545RFE
DLC Cable
TECH 1A
TECH 1 OBD II Vehicle Interface Module (VIM) (P/N 02001808)
Application Cartridge
VIM 16/24 Pin Adapter Cable (P/N 02001744)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 70
Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations
4. Getting Started
FIGURE 4-20. OBD II Adapter Configuration for Tech 1
Transmission: 2001-2004 40TE/41TE 1998-2004 42LE 2003-2004 42RLE 1999-2004 45RFE/545RFE
DLC Cable
TECH 1
TECH 1 OBD II VIM Adapter (P/N 02001198)
DC Power Cable
TECH 1 OBD II Vehicle Interface Module (VIM) (P/N 02001808)
Application Cartridge
VIM 16/24 Pin Adapter Cable (P/N 02001744)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 71
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
4. Getting Started
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) If you’re in doubt about the body type, engine type, or model year of the vehicle being tested, refer to the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). On OBD II vehicles, the VIN can be read electronically from the Information Mode. Below is an example of a DaimlerChrysler Corporation VIN. The location of the body type (car line/series), engine type, and model year characters are indicated.
Typical DaimlerChrysler Corporation VIN TYPICAL VIN
1 P 4F H 4 0 3 0 J X 2 1 4 5 8 9
VIN CHARACTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CAR LINE/SERIES (5th DIGIT)
ENGINE CODE (8th DIGIT)
MODEL YEAR (10th DIGIT) D = 1983 E = 1984 F = 1985 G = 1986 H = 1987 J = 1988 K = 1989 L = 1990 M = 1991 N = 1992 P = 1993
R = 1994 S = 1995 T = 1996 V = 1997 W = 1998 X = 1999 Y = 2000 1 = 2001 2 = 2002 3 = 2003 4 = 2004
The information included in the VIN, when used with the select tree diagrams and the VIN charts (immediately following this chapter), can be used to verify engine type selection. The select tree diagrams list the correct 8th VIN digit for each engine type selection displayed by the tester. The VIN charts list the engine code (8th digit), model year (10th digit), and the car line (5th digit), when it is necessary to distinguish from other engine types.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 72
5. SELECTING AND OPERATING TEST MODES
This chapter provides a detailed description of each test available in this application. Following the test descriptions, step-by-step instructions tell you how to quickly perform the test. A list of the active keys for each test is included at the end of each test mode.
TEST MODES SUMMARY The following table gives you a quick summary of the test modes available within this application. Detailed descriptions of the test modes are given in the appropriate sections of this chapter. The tester only displays the test modes that are applicable to the vehicle being tester.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 73
Test Modes Summary
SYSTEM Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE
SUBMODE
DESCRIPTION
F0: Data List
F1: Engine F2: Fuel F3: Emissions F4: Misfire F5: Cruise
Displays engine Sensors and Input/Output data about the current condition of the engine system. Examples include Engine RPM, Purge Duty Cycle, and Fuel Status. This mode is not applicable to all vehicles.
F1: CDR
F0: Sensor Tests F1: Actuator Tests F2: DTC Review F3: Engine Running F4: Clear DTCs
Provides performance similar to Chrysler Diagnostic Readout Box such as reading DTCs, perform output controls, and display diagnostic data. This mode is not applicable to all vehicles.
F2: DTCs
F0: Read DTCs F1: Freeze Data F3: 1 Trip Fail F4: Clear Info
Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded by the powertrain ECU. Freeze Frame information is available for applicable model years. The ability to Clear DTC information is also found in this mode.
F3: Snapshot
Gives you the ability to capture Data List information for later analysis. Trigger point and trigger type are selectable by the user. Not all modes and submodes are supported by all vehicles.
F4: OBD Controls
F0: RPM Control F1: Actuator Test F2: Reset Memory F0: Adaptive Fuel F1: AIS Counter F2: Min Throttle F3: Cam/Crank F4: Door Locks F5: Flex Fuel % F6: Misfire Adapt F7: OBD Data F8: All Values F3: ASD Fuel System F4: Min Airflow Idle F5: Fuel Inj Kill F6: Purge Test F7: EGR Test F8: Base Timing F9: More F1: EMR Lamp F2: Barometer F3: Program VIN F4: Linear IAC
Provides the ability for bi-directional control of a component or device on and off, reset memory values, or write to vehicle memory. Examples include actuator tests, reset cam/crank sync, fuel injector kill, and program VIN. Not all modes and submodes are supported by all vehicles.
F5: System Tests
F0: Set Sync F1: TCC Test F2: LDP Monitor F2: NVLD Monitor
Allows you to perform diagnostic routines that return status information after the function has been performed. The results of the test/function is displayed to the user. Examples include Set Sync and LDP monitor test. Not all modes and submodes are supported by all vehicles.
F8: Information
F3: ECU Info F4: Vehicle Info F0: VIN F1: Configuration
Displays helpful information about the vehicle or system under test. This information may consist of PCM software identification, monitor information, or system identification.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 74
Test Modes Summary
SYSTEM Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE
SUBMODE
DESCRIPTION
F0: Data List
F0: Display Data F1: Data Setup F0: Display All F1: Custom List
Displays transmission Sensors and Input/Output data about the current condition of the transmission system. Examples include TPS Voltage, Autostick Gear Position, and Transmission Oil Temperature. Custom data lists are not applicable to all Transmission Systems.
F2: DTCs
F0: Read DTCs F3: 1 Trip Failure F4: Clear Info
Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded by the transmission ECU. One trip failure information is available for applicable model years. The ability to Clear DTC information is also found in this mode.
F3: Snapshot
Gives you the ability to capture Data List information for later analysis. Trigger point and trigger type are selectable by the user. This mode is only available for selected transmissions.
F4: OBD Controls
F0: A/T Outputs F1: RPM Display F2: CVI Monitor
Provides the ability for bi-directional control of a component or device on and off. Examples include solenoid actuator tests.
F5: System Tests
F0: Quick Learn F1: Pinion Factor F0: Read F1: Reprogram F2: TCC Break-In F0: View Status F1: Change Status
Allows you to perform diagnostic routines that return status information after the function has been performed. The results of the test/function is displayed to the user. Examples include Pinion Factor programming and Quick Learn procedure.
F8: Information
F3: ECU Info F4: Vehicle Info F0: VIN F1: Configuration
Displays helpful information about the vehicle or system under test. This information may consist of TCM software identification, VIN information, or system identification.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 75
Selecting Test Modes
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECTING TEST MODES The Chrysler cartridge makes selecting the test mode easy by displaying a Test Mode menu. The Chrysler cartridge has the capability to display the test modes that are unique to the engine (or transmission) configuration that you are testing. You should find that the test modes available for Engine systems and Transmission systems are similar, and this section of the manual describes the test modes available for each system. However, some tests may not be available for a particular system and are indicated in the mode description of this manual. To select a test mode, simply press the key listed to the left of the test mode on the menu. Since there are up - * to seven test modes available, keys ) are used. The tester displays only three test modes at a time. To see the other test modes, scroll the menu down by pressing the u key. Pressing the d key scrolls the menu up. Regardless of which text modes are displayed, any test mode can be selected at any time from the menu.
SELECT ENGINE
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
F0:
to Data List display
F2:
to DTCs display
F3:
to Snapshot mode
F4:
to OBD Controls mode
F5:
to System Tests mode
F8:
to Information display
d u SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
Once you have selected the test mode, operation begins. Detailed operating instructions for each test mode X are given in this section. To return to the Test Mode menu, press .
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 76
Mode F0: Data List
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F0: DATA LIST The purpose of the Data List mode is to monitor Engine (or Transmission) data parameters, depending on your selection of system to test. For 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II), the Data List mode includes Input/Output States and Sensor Values. The tester displays data parameters in pre-programmed data parameter pairs for each engine (or transmission) type. You can also create your own pairs through the process explained on page 79.
NOTE
Pre-programmed data lists are constructed to support the vehicle with the most diagnostic information. For this reason, there may be parameters that are not applicable to the vehicle under test.
To select Data List, do the following:
1. Select the Data List mode from the Test Mode menu by pressing ) . 2a. If the selected system is an NGC Engine System, you need to choose from the five available data lists. The software also allows the user to select a custom data list which is a subset of the selected list for a faster update rate. 2b. If the selected engine type is Feedback Carburetor (FBC), the tester tells you to USE F1: CDR TO READ DATA LIST [EXIT]. This is a reminder that FBC engines do not support Data List and that F1: CDR mode must be used to read engine data parameters. Press ! to directly enter CDR mode, or to return to the Test X Mode menu. 2c. If the selected engine type is a 1983-1988 Fuel Injected or 1989 2.2L Turbo II model, the tester tells you to CRANK OR START ENGINE THEN PUSH [YES]. This step must be performed before entering Data List for these vehicles. 3. Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the Y and N keys. 4. The data parameters can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible printer. For instructions on connecting the printer to the tester and printing the data parameters, refer to the operator’s manual if you are using a Tech 1A or MTS 3100. If you are using a Tech 1, refer to the RS232C/IF Operator’s Manual. 5. If the tester receives no data from the EEC (or EATX controller), after two seconds it displays:
NO DATA, VERIFY IGN ON, YEAR = 93 EXIT: RESELECT F3: REPLAY DATA
or
NO DATA, VERIFY IGNITION ON, CHECK CABLES OR RESELECT [EXIT]
This display points out the three most likely causes of a NO DATA condition: •
The ignition is not ON.
•
The data link cable and Chrysler adapter are not firmly connected to the vehicle Diagnostic Connector.
•
The model year selection is incorrect.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 77
Mode F0: Data List
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
If the tester successfully receives data parameters from the EEC, but then communication is lost, the Data List display flashes. This tells you that the tester and EEC are no longer communicating, while allowing you to still display the last data parameters received by the tester.
X 6. You may return to the Test Mode menu at any time by pressing . Operation of the Data List mode is summarized in Figure 5-1. SELECT ENGINE
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
! FBC ENGINES
x
! EFI ENGINES
USE F1: CDR TO READ DATA LIST [EXIT]
x CRANK OR START ENGINE THEN PUSH [YES]
y EEC DATA RECEIVED
$ PRINT
ENGINE SPEED 2150 RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 980 RPM
THIS DISPLAY DOES NOT APPEAR FOR 1989 AND NEWER MODELS* * Except 1989 2.2L Turbo II
NO EEC DATA RECEIVED NO DATA. VERI FY IGNITION ON, CHECK CABLES OR RESELECT [EXIT]
y n
DATA LIST PAIRS
FIGURE 5-1. Example of Data List Mode
VIEWING DATA PARAMETERS In order to maximize the information that can be seen at one time, the tester displays data parameters in pairs. There are up to forty-three pre- programmed pairs for each engine type. A typical pair of data parameters is shown below. ENGINE SPEED 900 RPM SPARK ADVANCE 13° BTDC
To see the other pre-programmed data pairs available for the engine type you’ve selected, press either the or N key. The Y key causes the tester to scroll forwards through the list of pre-programmed Y pairs. The N key causes backwards scrolling. Appendix C contains a description of all engine and transmission data parameters and tables showing which data parameters can be monitored for each engine type. Not all data parameters are transmitted by every EEC (or EATX controller); therefore, not all data parameters can be monitored for each EEC (or EATX controller).
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 78
Mode F0: Data List
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs different from the pre-programmed pairs. Any two parameters which can be monitored for the engine type you selected can be made into a pair. New data pairs are created simply by scrolling either t he bottom or top display parameter, while the other display parameter is fixed. Pressing ) causes the top display parameter to be fixed, which is indicated with a * in the left column of the second line of the display, as shown in Fig. A in Figure 5-2. Pressing ! causes the bottom display parameter to be fixed, as shown i n Fig. B. To unfix the top parameter, press ! . Press ) to unfix the lower parameter. The tester won’t allow both top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time. As an example, let’s say you wish to create a pair with ENGINE SPEED and BARO. To do so, scroll through the pre-programmed pairs with the Y or N key until you find a pair with ENGINE SPEED. Fix ENGINE SPEED by pressing ) if ENGINE SPEED is the top parameter, ! if it is the bottom. Then scroll the other half of the display with either the Y or N key until BARO is displayed.
ENGINE SPEED 875 RPM BARO (kPa, inHg) * 101 kPa 30.0 inHg
* FIXES TOP PARAMETER
ENGINE SPEED 875 RPM * BARO (kPa, inHg) 101 kPa 30.0 inHg
* FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER
Fig. B
Fig. A
FIGURE 5-2. Data Pairs Example
ACTIVE KEYS Y , N
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
)
Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs.
!
Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs.
x
Return to Test Mode menu.
CREATE A CUSTOM DATA LIST When testing a transmission that supports the PCI Bus data link, you have the option of viewing all parameters in the data list by selecting F0: DISPLAY ALL, or you can create a custom data list by selecting F1: CUSTOM LIST. The update rate of the data list varies depending on the number of displayed parameters. The more parameters you select, the slower the update rate i s.
Submode F0: Display Data Displays the data list that was last selected by the user. The data list is either a list of all parameters or the custom list that was made after the tester was powered up.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 79
Mode F0: Data List
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Submode F1: Data Setup Allows you to view all data parameters or a custom built data list. If you do not select it, the tester defaults to selecting a list of all diagnostic data parameters. Submode F0: Display All
Displays all diagnostic data parameters available. The tester displays all information in the data list format. Because of the number of parameters in the data list, the update rate can be three seconds or longer. Submode F1: Custom List
You can scroll through the list of all available parameters using the u and d keys. From this list, you can select any combination of parameters. To build a custom data list f or display, press Y to SELECT a parameter and N to DE-SELECT a parameter. When you finish selecting all desired parameters, press E to go directly to the display mode. The tester remembers the selected parameters (until the tester is turned off), so you do not have to re-select the parameters every time.
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
) DATA LIST MENU F0: DISPLAY DATA F1: DATA SETUP
)
!
Displays the data list that was last selected by the user. The data list is either a list of all parameters or a custom list.
DATA LIST SETUP F0: DISPLAY ALL F1: CUSTOM LIST
)
!
Displays a list of all available data parameters.
PUMP MOTOR ***SELECT*** YES: SELECT NO: DE-SELECT
E Displays the custom data list selected by the user.
FIGURE 5-3. Example of Custom Data List
ACTIVE KEYS y , n
Select and deselect data parameters.
u , d
Scroll through data parameters while selecting a custom list.
e
Display custom data list selected by the user.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 80
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F1: CDR - ENGINE The CDR mode of the tester is very similar to using the Chrysler Diagnostic Readout Box. Using CDR mode, you can follow the diagnostic procedures described in the Chrysler Service Manuals. The CDR mode is available for F0: ENGINE systems only. CDR mode is available for all 1983-1988 engines, as well as 1989 2.2L Turbo II models. CDR functions available are restricted to functions supported by the vehicle EEC; therefore, not all CDR functions are available for all engine types. Tests in the CDR mode allow you to: •
Read fault codes stored in the EEC. All codes present in the EEC at the beginning of CDR mode testing are stored in the tester memory for later review.
•
Perform switch tests on various switches.
•
Read sensor values (key on, engine off).
•
Control various engine actuators.
•
Review previously read diagnostic trouble codes.
•
Clear codes for 1987-88 and 1989 Turbo II fuel injected models.
•
Perform the following engine running tests: •
Control RPM between two states (idle and 1500 RPM) while monitoring rich/lean and knock status.
•
Read sensor values (key on, engine running).
NOTE
Because of the way the EEC operates during CDR mode, you must first perform the Read DTCs and Switch Test functions before the CDR menu is accessible.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 81
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT ENGINE
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
!
= READ DTCs = HOLD DTCs
EFI
CARB
OPEN CARBURETOR SWITCH AND TURN IGNITION KEY TO THE ON POSITION
CYCLE IGNITION KEY 3 TIMES
TECH 1 READS FAULT CODES
3 SECONDS OR PRESS u KEY
DTC: 88 START OF DTCs READ
x
USE d TO HOLD CODE
STORED DTCs READ AND DISPLAYED
DTCs 88 XX XX 55
FAULT CODE SUMMARY
x
[YES]
y
CDR SWITCH TEST ACTIVE 88 [YES] = END TEST
x
y CDR Mode Flowchart
CDR MENU VARIES DEPENDING ON VEHICLE SELECTED
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS F4: CLEAR DTCs
x
FIGURE 5-4. CDR - Engine Mode
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 82
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
READ DTCS This function is available for all 1983-1988 models and 1989 2.2L Turbo II models. Codes stored in the EEC memory at the onset of CDR mode tests are displayed one at a time, along with a description of the code. To select Read DTCs, do the following:
1. To begin the Read DTCs function, press F1: CDR. The tester displays u =READ DTCs, d =HOLD DTCs for three seconds, or until U is pressed. 2. For fuel injected models, the tester displays: CYCLE IGNITION KEY 3 TIMES. Turn the key ON, OFF, ON, OFF, ON and leave it i n the ON position. For carbureted models, the tester displays: OPEN CARBURETOR SWITCH AND TURN IGNITION KEY TO THE ON POSITION. With the key off, press the accelerator pedal to the floor, then turn the key to ON.
NOTE
On carbureted models, if you cannot mode past this display try selecting a different model year with the same engine. Some CDR test mode software used on Chrysler vehicles may intermittently exhibit problems.
MTS 3100 and Tech 1A users: Make sure that t he adapter you are using is P/N 02002154. 3. The EEC transmits all stored codes to the tester, always beginning with code 88 and ending with 55. Codes 88 and 55 do not indicate problems with the engine. Their meanings are as follows: 88 - beginning of diagnostic trouble codes 55 - end of diagnostic trouble codes Each code is displayed for about four seconds, along with a description. To HOLD the code currently displayed, press D . Pressing U continues code transmission. The READ/HOLD status is indicated at the bottom of the tester display.
READ/HOLD STATUS DTC: 42 ASD RELAY READ
4. Once all codes have been displayed (indicated by code 55), the tester displays a summary of all codes it received: DTCs 88 42 33 55 (YES)
X 5. Press Y to begin the Switch Test, or to return to the Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 83
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS u
READ
d
HOLD
x y
Return to Test Mode menu. Enter Switch Test mode.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 84
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SWITCH TESTS CDR Switch Tests are available for all 1983-1988 vehicles and 1989 2.2L Turbo II models. The switches capable of being tested vary depending on the year and model of the vehicle. See the Chrysler Service Manual for the vehicle you are testing. This test does not tell you which switch has been activated, or whether the switch is off or on. It can only tell you that the state of the switch has changed (off to on, or on to off). To select Switch Tests, do the following:
1. Enter the CDR mode by pressing ! in the Test Mode menu. Press Y after performing the Read DTC function. 2. Turn the selected vehicle switch (Brake, Blower Fan, etc.) on or off while watching the 88 or 00 displayed on line 3 of the tester screen. If the switch changes state, the 88 changes to 00 or the 00 changes to 88.
88 OR 00
CDR SWITCH TEST ACTIVE 88 [YES] = END TEST
X 3. Press Y to end the Switch Test and enter the CDR menu, or press to return to the Test Mode menu.
ACTIVE KEYS Y X
End Switch Test, enter CDR menu. Return to Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 85
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
CDR TEST MODE MENU Only CDR tests that are supported by the EEC of the vehicle being tested are displayed in the CDR menu. While performing the CDR tests, or while viewing the CDR menu, you may hear clicking noises in the engine compartment. This is due to the tester and EEC communicating and is quite normal. CDR TEST MENU #1
CDR TEST MENU #2
SELECT MODE F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW
SELECT MODE F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS
1985 FBC 1986 FBC (1.6L, 2.2L “L” Body)
1983-84 TBI 1984 Turbo
CDR TEST MENU #3
CDR TEST MENU #4
SELECT MODE F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW
1985 TBI 1985 Turbo
1986 FBC 2.2L (except 2.2L “L” Body), 3.7L, 5.2L
CDR TEST MENU #5
CDR TEST MENU #6
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS F4: CLEAR DTCs
1986 TBI 1986-87 Turbo 1987 TBI (2.2L, 2.5L Non-Minivan) 1987-88 FBC
1987 TBI (2.5L Minivan) 1987-88 MFI 1988 Turbo 1988 TBI 1989 2.2L Turbo II
ACTIVE KEYS - $ )
X
Select CDR test. Return to the Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 86
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F0: SENSOR TESTS Sensor Tests are not available for 1983-85 models, 1986 1.6L models, and 1986 2.2L L body models. The Sensor Test mode enables you to display individual sensor stat es and voltage levels as they are monitored by the EEC. When changing displayed sensor with Y and N , don’t be alarmed by clicking or other noises from the engine. To select Sensor Tests, do the following:
1. From the CDR test menu, press ) to enter the Sensor Tests mode. 2. When Sensor Tests is selected, the tester displays the first sensor test available for the specific vehicle being tested. Press the Y key to scroll through the sensors available for testing. After the last available sensor test, the tester display returns to the first sensor test. Pressing N causes the tester to scroll backward through the tests available. (Scrolling with the N key is much slower than scrolling with the Y key because of the way the EEC transmits the data.) 3. When a sensor is selected, WAITING is displayed on line 3 of the tester screen unti l the EEC responds with data. If the tester loses communication with the EEC, NO DATA is displayed on line 3 . If sensor is not available for the model being tested, TEST UNAVAILABLE is displayed on line 3. 4. While a sensor is being tested, the tester screen displays the sensor number (same as in the Chrysler Service Manual) in the upper right hand corner. A description of the sensor is displayed on line two. Raw data that would be displayed on the Chrysler diagnostic readout box is displayed in parentheses, followed by engineering units on line 3.
X 5. Press to return to the CDR menu. SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS F4: CLEAR DTCs
) Raw data, Chrysler diagnostic readout box format SENSOR TEST 01 BATT TEMP SENSOR (31) 3.1 VOLTS
y n SENSOR TEST 02 O2 SENSOR (08) 0.8 VOLTS
x
Data converted to Engineering units
x
y n
More Sensor Tests
FIGURE 5-5. Sensor Tests
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 87
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS y , n x
Scroll through the Sensor Tests (pressing the y key is faster). Return to the CDR menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 88
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F1: ACTUATOR TESTS The circuit Actuator Test Mode (ATM) allows you to cycle various actuators on and off in order to verify that the actuator and circuit are operating properly. 1983-1984 models have onl y one ATM test. When changing the displayed actuator with Y or N , do not be alarmed by clicking or other noises from the engine. To select Actuator Tests, do the following:
1. From the CDR test menu, press ! to select actuator tests. 2. When the actuator test is selected, the tester displays the first actuator test available for the model being tested. The tester displays the number of the actuator (same as in the Chrysler manuals) it is exercising in the upper right corner so you can listen for click(s), indicating a change of state. ACTUATOR TEST 01 SPARK WAITING
X 3. Press Y to change to the next actuator, or to return to the CDR menu. After the last actuator test, pressing Y returns you to the first actuator test. Due to the EEC, the N key scrolls backward through the actuator tests much slower than Y scrolls forward. When a new actuator is selected for testing, WAITING is displayed on line 3 until the EEC responds. When the actuator is activated, ACTIVE is displayed and you can usually hear clicking noises from the actuator. 4. If the tester loses communication wi th the EEC, NO DATA is displayed on li ne 3. If the selected actuator is not available for the vehicle being tested, TEST UNAVAILABLE is displayed.
X 5. Press to return to the CDR menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 89
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS F4: CLEAR DTCs
! LINE 3 COULD BE: "NO DATA" "WAITING" "TEST UNAVAILABLE"
ACTUATOR TEST 01 SPARK ACTIVE
x
y n ACTUATOR TEST 02 INJECTOR FIRE ACTIVE
x
y n
More Actuator Tests
FIGURE 5-6. Actuator Tests
ACTIVE KEYS , n y
x
Scroll through available actuator tests. Return to CDR test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 90
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F2: DTC REVIEW The DTC Review function of the CDR mode allows you to review EEC fault codes that were saved in the tester memory when CDR testing began.
NOTE
Since the codes displayed in the DTC Review function are from the tester memory and not from the EEC, any codes that might have been set while performing CDR tests are not included. To view the most current EEC X codes, from the CDR mode, t hen press ! to enter CDR again and perform the Read DTCs function.
To select DTC Review, do the following:
1. From the CDR test menu, press @ for DTC Review. 2. The DTC Review function operates the same as the Read DTC function, except that the READ/HOLD option is missing and the CYCLE IGNITION KEY 3 TIMES or OPEN CARBURETOR SWITCH AND TURN IGNITION KEY TO THE ON POSITION action is not necessary to initiate code display. The tester displays all diagnostic trouble codes that were stored in the EEC at the start of CDR mode operation.
X 3. Press Y or to return to the CDR test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 91
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS F4: CLEAR DTCs
@
DTC: 88 START OF DTCs READ
DISPLAYED DTCs
x
STORED DTCs READ AND DISPLAYED
DTC: 55 END OF DTCs READ
DTCs 88 XX XX XX 55
DTC SUMMARY
(YES)
y
FIGURE 5-7. DTC Review
ACTIVE KEYS y x
Return to CDR test menu. Return to CDR test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 92
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F3: ENGINE RUNNING TESTS The Engine Running Tests vary depending on the engine type being tested. Only tests available for the selected model are displayed by the tester. To select Engine Running Tests, do the following:
1. From the CDR test menu, press # for Engine Running Tests. 2. When engine running tests is first entered, the tester displays a message: START ENGINE, THEN PUSH [YES]. When this has been done , the engine running test menu is displayed. The menu varies depending on the vehicle being tested. F0:O2
1983-1985 TBI, 1987-1988 2.2L FBC
F0:O2/KNOCK
1984-1985 TURBO
F0:O2/AIS
1986 TBI
F0:O2/KNOCK/AIS
1986 TURBO
F0:O2/AIS F1:SENSOR TESTS
1987-1988 NON-TURBO FUEL INJECTION
F0:O2/KNOCK/AIS F1:SENSOR TESTS
1987-1988 TURBO, 1989 TURBO II
X Pressing returns to the Main test menu, NOT to the CDR menu. Once the engine has been started, if you wish to return to the CDR test menu, you must restart the CDR mode. This is due to the EEC operation.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 93
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F0: SENSOR TEST F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: DTC REVIEW F3: RUNNING TESTS F4: CLEAR DTCs
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
#
TO BEGIN TESTS START THE ENGINE AND THEN PRESS [YES]
x
y x
ENGINE RUN TESTS F0: O2/AIS/KNOCK F1: SENSOR TEST
)
x
ENGINE RUN TESTS = 1500 RPM = IDLE RPM
!
THIS SCREEN ONLY IF AIS TEST AVAILABLE
3 SECONDS OR TO ADVANCE
x
ENGINE RUN TESTS O2: ( ) KNOCK: RPM: IDLE
Raw data, Chrysler Diagnostic readout box format
SENSOR TEST 01 BATT TEMP SENSOR (31) 3.1 VOLTS
x
Data converted to Engineering units
y n SENSOR TEST 02 O2 SENSOR (08) 0.8 VOLTS
x
y n
More Sensor Tests
FIGURE 5-8. Engine Running Tests 3. In the O2\KNOCK\AIS part of the engine running test you can check idle speed motor operation by toggling the engine speed between t wo states: idle and 1500 RPM. You can check that the oxygen sensor is switching back and forth between rich and lean status. On Turbo models you can display the knock sensor status. If you select ) the tester displays the following for 3 seconds: ENGINE RUN TESTS, [ = 1500 RPM, ] = IDLE RPM. This informs you that U and D are used to control engine RPM. The screen then changes to:
RICH/LEAN STATUS AS DISPLAYED BY THE CHRYSLER DIAGNOSTIC READOUT BOX
RICH/LEAN STATUS ENGINE RUN TESTS O2: RICH (1) KNOCK: INACTIVE RPM: IDLE KNOCK STATUS
COMMANDED IDLE SPEED. USE u TO CHANGE d
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 94
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Note how the data fields are blank until data i s received. (This can take several minutes if the engine is cold, as data is transmitted only when the engine is operati ng in closed-loop mode.) Line 4 is blank if the vehicle being tested has no AI S control capability. Line 2 displays current rich/lean information. The O2 state changes between LEAN, RICH, and blank. Blank indicates a center condition which is neither rich nor lean. Raw data that would be displayed on the Chrysler diagnostic readout box is displayed in parentheses at the end of line 2 as follows: Fuel injection: RICH = 1, LEAN = 0, CENTER = blank. Carburetor: RICH = -, LEAN & CENTER = blank. Line 3 displays knock data for Turbo models. (KNOCK is always displayed, even if the vehicle is not a Turbo.) The possible states of line 3 are ACTIVE or INACTIVE. If the vehicle is non-Turbo, N/A is displayed. Line 4 displays RPM information. (This line is blank if the vehicle does not support the AIS test.) The engine RPM can be changed between IDLE and 1500 by pressing the U and D keys. The O2 sensor must be warmed up (engine operating in closed-loop mode) before performing the AIS test. 4. Press to return to the Engine Running test menu. X
ACTIVE KEYS u
Toggle engine speed to 1500 RPM.
d
Toggle engine to idle speed.
x
Return to Engine Running test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 95
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Engine Running Sensor Tests The Engine Running Sensor Tests operates exactly like the Sensor Tests, except that the tests are performed with the engine running. To select Engine Running Sensor Tests, do the following:
1. From the CDR test menu, press # to select the Engine Running Tests. 2. When engine running tests is first entered, the m essage: START ENGINE, THEN PUSH [YES] is displayed. 3. Press ! to select the Sensor Tests from the Engine Running t est menu. The first Sensor Test available for the specific vehicle being tested is displayed. Press the Y and N keys to scroll through the sensors available for testing. 4. While a sensor is being tested, the tester screen displays the sensor number (same as in the Chrysler Service Manual) in the upper right hand corner. A description of the sensor is displayed on line two. Raw data that would be displayed on the Chrysler diagnostic readout box is displayed in parentheses on line 3, followed by engineering units.
Raw data, Chrysler Diagnostic readout box format SENSOR TEST 01 BATT TEMP SENSOR (22) 2.2V
Data converted to Engineering units
X 5. Press to return to the Engine Running test menu (not the CDR menu).
ACTIVE KEYS y x
Scroll to next sensor in Sensor Test. Return to Engine Running test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 96
Mode F1: CDR - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F4: CLEAR DTCS The Clear DTCs function of the CDR mode allows you to clear diagnostic trouble codes from the EEC memory on 1987 and 1988 fuel-injected models and 1989 2.2L Turbo II models. To select Clear DTCs, do the following:
1. From the CDR menu, press $ to select the Clear DTCs submode. 2. When Clear DTCs is selected, Tech 1 displays CLEARING DTCs for several seconds on line 2. When codes have been cleared, DTCs CLEARED is displayed on line 2, then returns to the CDR test menu.
CLEARING DTCs
DTCs CLEARED
3. If the codes are not successfully cleared, after 30 seconds the tester displays:
DTCs NOT ERASED VERIFY ENGINE NOT RUNNING [EXIT]
ACTIVE KEYS x
Return to CDR test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 97
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F2: DTCS SUBMODE F0: READ DTCS The purpose of the DTC test mode is to read engine (or transmission) fault codes that are stored in the ECU controller memory depending on your selection of system to test. Each DTC present is displayed with its Chrysler DTC number (1983-2004), DTC description, the number of key cycles since the DTC last occurred, and the SAE defined P-code number (if available). The number of key cycles is only displayed for the most current engine DTCs. If no trouble codes are present, the tester displays a NO DTC message. Appendix B of this manual describes each fault code in detail. To select Read DTCs, do the following:
1. Select the DTCs mode from the Test Mode menu by pressing @ . F0: ENGINE: If the EEC of the vehicle being t ested does not support the diagnostic trouble codes mode, the tester displays the message USE F1:CDR TO READ FAULT CODES [EXIT]. For these models you may press ! to go directly to the CDR mode, or press to return to the Test Mode menu. X 2. Select READ DTCs from the DTC menu by pressing ) . F0: ENGINE: For 1983-1988 EFI vehicles, the tester asks you to CRANK OR START ENGINE, THEN PUSH YES. 3a. If DTCs are present, the tester automatically displays each DTC for 3 seconds. If no DTCs are present, the tester displays NO DTCs ACTIVE for three seconds, then automatically return to the Test Mode menu. 3b. If testing an engine system that has an NGC ECU, the DTCs are displayed as four-digit P-codes. To view the description of the DTC, move the asterisk to the desired DTC number, and press E . To view specific information about the DTC, such as Starts, Warmups, Key Cycles, and Good Trips, press the d key. 3c. If testing a transmission that supports the PCI Bus data link, the DTCs are displayed as four-digit Pcodes. To view the description of the DTC, move the asterisk to the desired DTC number, and press E . If no DTCs are present, the tester displays NO DTCs ACTIVE, and then displays the number of key cycles since the DTC information was cleared.
DTCs P xx xx P xx xx P xx xx P xx xx P xx xx P xx xx
4. A DTC can be held by pressing the D key while the code is being displayed. This allows t ime to record the DTC or view OBD II information about the displayed DTC. This function does not apply to all systems. 5. To view OBD II information about the displayed engine DTC, press the E key while the code is being displayed. If more than one engine DTC is set, you can scroll through t he OBD II information by using the U / D keys. To return to DTC display, press . This function does not apply to all X systems. 6. If the EEC does not support the OBD II information about the engine DTC, the tester displays the message OBD II TRIP INFORMATION NOT AVAILABLE. This f unction does not apply to all systems.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 98
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT ENGINE
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs
1 Trip Fail is not supported by all systems.
@ Freeze Data only applies to model year 1996 and later engine systems.
DTCs F0: READ DTCs F1: FREEZE DATA F3: 1 TRIP FAIL F4: CLEAR INFO
USE F1: CDR TO READ FAULT CODES [EXIT]
)
x
CRANK OR START ENGINE THEN PUSH [YES] This display does not appear for 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.22 Turbo II)
x
x
x
= ADVANCE = HOLD ENTER = INFO EXIT = QUIT
NO DTCs ACTIVE
3 SEC
3 SECONDS OR PRESS u KEY
x
DTC 1B
(P0123) TPS VOLTAGE HIGH KEY CYCLES 03
MORE CODE SCREENS IF CODES ARE SET
x
x
DTC 1B (P0123) MIL OFF DIAG RUN YES TRIP COUNT 03
MORE DTC INFO SCREENS IF CODES ARE SET
DTCs 1B 1E 13 SINCE LAST FC [YES]
y
x
e
Line 3 only in 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II)
WOULD YOU LIKE TO CLEAR THE DTCs? [YES/NO]
y 87-88 EFI & 89 TURBO II
x
1989 AND LATER (EXCEPT 1989 2.2L TURBO II)
USE F1: CDR IN ORDER TO CLEAR DTCs [EXIT]
CLEARING DTCs
C OD ES C LE AR ED
83–86 EFI
DISCONNECT BATTERY FOR 10 sec
C OD ES N OT C LE AR ED
DTCs NOT ERASED VERIFY ENGINE NOT RUNNING [EXIT]
DTCs CLEARED
x
x
3 SECONDS
FIGURE 5-9. Example of SBEC/JTEC Engine Fault Codes 7. When all codes have been displayed, a diagnostic trouble code summary is displayed:
IGNITION CYCLES DTCs XX XX XX XX 13 SINCE LAST FC [YES]
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 99
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
F0: ENGINE
For 1989 and newer models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II), line 3 of the diagnostic trouble code summary display also includes the number of ignition cycles that have occurred since the last diagnostic trouble code was set. If this number is zero, a fault is currently active. If the number is more than zero, no fault is currently active. DTC: 22 2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT RESET COUNT: 0
F1: TRANSMISSION
For EATX systems, line 4 of the diagnostic trouble code display also includes the number of ignition cycles that have occurred since the DTC was set. This is displayed as Reset Count. However, in order for Reset Count to function properly, one of the following criteria needs to be met: •
Start engine and depress accelerator pedal or
•
Start engine and change the gear selector.
8. After the diagnostic trouble code summary has been displayed, the tester asks if you want to clear the codes: WOULD YOU LIKE TO CLEAR THE DTCs? [YES/NO]
Press Y to clear DTCs, or N to return to the Test Mode menu. Diagnostic trouble codes can also be cleared using the F4: CLEAR INFO mode.
X 9. Press to terminate the DTCs mode and return to the Test Mode menu.
NOTE Diagnostic trouble codes can also be displayed in the SNAPSHOT mode (F0: ENGINE system only).
ACTIVE KEYS u
Advance to next diagnostic trouble code. Scroll to next OBD II information screen.
d
Hold presently displayed diagnostic trouble code. Scroll to previous OBD II information screen.
y
Clear Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
n
Return to Test Mode menu.
x e
Return to Test Mode menu or exit from OBD II information. View OBD II information about DTC. View DTC description.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 100
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F1: FREEZE DATA - ENGINE The FREEZE DATA mode is only available on 1996 and lat er models selected under F0: ENG INE system. The NGC Engine ECU does not currently support the Freeze Data function. An OBD II vehicle has the capability to store diagnostic information that is related to the setting of a particular emission related DTC. This data is referred to as Freeze Frame Data and can be read by the tester using the FREEZE DATA mode. For model year 2000 and later, all trucks and some passenger car vehicles are capable of supporting two frames of FREEZE FRAME data. If there are t wo frames available, a menu is displayed allowing the user to select the FREEZE FRAME data for the desired DTC. If there is only one FREEZE FRAME, the data is automatically displayed. If there is no data, the tester displays NO FREEZE DATA AVAILABLE. If testing an engine system that has an NGC ECU, the ECU is capable of storing up to three unique Freeze Frames. Each Freeze Frame is selectable from the Freeze Frame menu. If there is no Freeze Frame information stored in memory, the tester will inform the user there is no data available. During normal operation, FREEZE DATA information is cleared any time stored DTCs are cleared from the vehicle’s controller. To select Freeze Data, do the following:
1. From the Select Mode menu, press @ to enter the DTC menu. 2. Select ! to enter the FREEZE DATA mode from the DTC menu. 3. Select a Freeze Frame from the menu. Most 2000 and newer engine systems support multiple frames. If the engine system supports a single Freeze Frame it will automatically be displayed. 4. FREEZE DATA information is then displayed in data list format.
NOTE Diagnostic trouble codes can also be displayed in the SNAPSHOT mode (F0: ENGINE system only).
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
@ DTCs F0: READ DTCs F1: FREEZE DATA F2: CLEAR DTCs
! FREEZE FRAME F1: Pxxxx F2: Pxxxx
! or @ FREEZE FRAME PARAMETERS
FIGURE 5-10. Example of SBEC/JTEC Freeze Data - Engine
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 101
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS !
Select FREEZE DATA.
Y , N
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
)
Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs. Unfix the lower parameter.
!
Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs. Unfix the upper parameter.
x
Return to Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 102
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F3: 1 TRIP FAILURE The purpose of the 1 TRIP FAIL submode is to read DTCs that have failed one trip and are stored in the ECU memory. These One Trip Failures have not met the conditions required to illuminate the MIL but still identify a problem. Results of the 1 TRIP FAIL mode are displayed in a manner similar to the DTC display mode with the same Pxxxx DTC designation and the same descriptors. This mode is supported by most 1999 and newer engine and transmission systems. To select Trip Failure, do the following:
1. From the Select Mode menu, press @ to enter the DTC menu. 2. Select # to enter the 1 TRIP FAIL mode from the DTC menu. Any failures in this mode are displayed in the DTC format. 3. To view the description of the DTC, move the asterisk to the desired DTC number, and press e . To view specific information about the DTC, such as Starts, Warmups, Key Cycles, and Good Trips, press the d key. If the specific information is not supported for the selected DTC, the software may display "Requested Data Out of Range". SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
@ DTCs F0: READ DTCs F3: 1 TRIP FAIL F4: CLEAR INFO
#
DTCs Pxxxx Pxxxx
e
P0627 FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT
FIGURE 5-11. Example of 1 Trip Failure
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 103
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F4: CLEAR INFORMATION The CLEAR INFO submode comm ands the clearing of f ault codes stored in the EEC or EATX controller. Codes can also be cleared after they have been displayed using the F0: READ DTCs test mode.
CAUTION!
Performing the CLEAR INFO procedure on OBD II Engine Systems also clears diagnostic information such as Freeze Frame Data and OBD II Monitors.
CAUTION
This test mode clears the codes only for 1989 and later engine systems (except 1989 2.2 L Turbo II). For other systems (including EATX), this test mode displays a message describing the required procedure t o clear the codes. To select Clear Information, do the following:
1. Make sure the engine is not running. 2. Select DTC from the Test Mode menu by pressing @ . 3. Select the CLEAR INFO submode from the DTCs mode by pressing $ .
NOTE
•
For F0: ENGINE systems, the engine must not be running and the ignition key must be on.
•
For F1: TRANSMISSION systems, the ignition key must be on.
4. The tester displays one of the following: DISCONNECT BATTERY FOR 10 SEC
USE F1: CDR IN ORDER TO CLEAR CODES [EXIT]
A
CLEARING DTCs
B
C
FIGURE 5-12. Clear Information Messages For carbureted and 1983-1986 fuel injected engines, display A in Figure 5-12 tells you the battery must be X disconnected for 10 seconds to clear the codes. Press to return to Test Mode menu. Display B reminds you that CDR mode allows you to clear the codes for 1987-1988 fuel injected engines and the 1989 2.2L Turbo II. For 1989 and later vehicles (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II), display C indicates the tester has commanded the EEC or EATX controller to cl ear the codes. After two seconds, the tester then displays one of the following:
DTCs CLEARED
D
DTCs NOT ERASED VERIFY ENGINE NOT RUNNING [EXIT]
E
FIGURE 5-13. Clear Information Result Messages Display D in Figure 5-13 indicates the codes were successfully cleared, then the tester automatically returns to the Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 104
Mode F2: DTCs
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Display E tells you the EEC or EATX controller could not clear its fault codes. The message remains until X you press to return to the Test Mode menu. For F0: ENGINE systems, verify that the engine is not running, then try F4: CLEAR INFO again. For F1: TRANSMISSION, cycle the ignition key and try F4: CLEAR INFO again.
SELECT ENGINE
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F1: CDR F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
@
DTCs F0: READ DTCs F1: FREEZE DATA F3: 1 TRIP FAIL F4: CLEAR INFO
$
CLEARING DTCs
F2 @ 87-88 EFI & 89 TURBO II
x
1989 AND NEWER (EXCEPT TURBO II)
USE F1: CDR IN ORDER TO CLEAR DTCs [EXIT]
CLEARING DTCs
C OD ES CL EA RE D
83–86 EFI
DISCONNECT BATTERY FOR 10 sec
CO DE S N OT CL EA RE D
DTCs NOT ERASED VERIFY ENGINE NOT RUNNING [EXIT]
DTCs CLEARED
x
3 SECONDS
FIGURE 5-14. Example of Engine Clear DTCs
ACTIVE KEYS x
Return to Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 105
Mode F3: Snapshot
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F3: SNAPSHOT The purpose of the SNAPSHOT test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing data parameters just before and/or after the problem occurs. In this mode, you specify a trigger condition, and the tester stores data both before and/or after the trigger occurrence. After the data has been captured, you can scroll through all of the stored data for display. Data parameters are displayed in a manner identical to that of the Data List mode. You can also specify the data sample you wish to display, as described in Step 10. In addition, the cartridge has the capability to print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample. Note that your tester has been set up to capture data parameters at the fastest rate possible. When diagnosing electronic transmissions that support a custom data list, a smaller list benefits you by reducing the time between data parameter samples which can aid in intermittent faul t diagnosis.
SELECTING SNAPSHOT The operation of the SNAPSHOT mode is divided into three phases: Set-Up, Data Capture, and Data Display. The sequence of operations is depicted in t he flow chart in Figure 5-15. To select Set-Up Phase of Snapshot mode, do the following:
1. Select the SNAPSHOT mode from the Test Mode menu by pressing # . 2. Select F9: TRIG POINT to determine the trigger point position of the upcoming snapshot. The default selected is the center of the snapshot. When the trigger point is selected, the tester returns to the previ ous menu. 3. Select trigger condition by pressing the function key ) , ! , @ displayed to the left of the trigger condition. SNAPSHOT F0: ANY DTC F1: SINGLE DTC F2: MANUAL TRIG F3: REPLAY DATA
You have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data by selecting F3:REPLAY DATA. All data captured during snapshot is retained in the tester until it is overwritten by a new snapshot or if the power is disconnected for more than 30 minutes. You also have the option to replay the snapshot data without being connected to the vehicle. If the tester has a stored a snapshot, you can access it from the Select System menu by pressing @ . 4. If you select F0: ANY DTC, the tester triggers the snapshot upon recognizing any DTC that is stored in the vehicle’s engine controller. If you are testing an NGC Engine System, the data list to be captured in snapshot must also be selected. If you select F1:SINGLE DTC, the tester asks you to enter the desired EEC fault code number. Depending on the model year vehicle, you can be asked to enter a 2-digit DTC, a hexadecimal DTC, or an OBD II P-code. You should enter the fault code, then press the E key. If the code you enter does not exist for t he engine type being tested, an INVALID CODE message is di splayed and the code has to be reentered. If you are testing an NGC Engine System, the data list to be captured in snapshot must also be selected. Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 106
Mode F3: Snapshot
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F0: DATA LIST F2: DTCs F3: SNAPSHOT
#
S NAPSHOT MODE F0: ANY DTC F1: SINGLE DTC F2: MANUAL TRIG F3: REPLAY DATA F9: TRIG POINT
)
!
(
) , ! , @
@ #
DATA LIST F1: Engine F2: Fuel F3: Emissions F4: Misfire F5: Cruise
SET-UP PHASE (SEE STEPS 1-4)
TRIGGER POINT AT: F0: BEGINNING F1: CENTER of F2: END of data
ENGINE SPEED 0 RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 0 RPM 0
SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER EEC CODE: P0123
PRESS ENTER, F9 OR EXIT TO TRIGGER
3 SECONDS OR PRESS u KEY
x
CRANK OR START ENGINE THEN PUSH [YES]
y
DATA CAPTURE PHASE (SEE STEPS 5-8)
x
ENGINE SPEED 2850 RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 980 RPM W
This display does not occur for 1989 and newer models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II). FLASHING W = WAITING FOR TRIGGER
USE y & n TO SELECT DIFFERENT DATA PARAMETERS
x
DATA DISPLAY PHASE (SEE STEPS 9-13)
ENGINE SPEED 2640 RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 980 RPM T
TECH 1 MEMORY x FULL OR
x
TRIGGER HAS OCCURED
USE y & n TO SELECT DIFFERENT DATA PARAMETERS
ENGINE SPEED 2710 RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 980 RPM 0
y n OTHER DATA LIST SCREENS
0 = TRIGGER POSITION – = BEFORE TRIGGER OCCURRED + = AFTER TRIGGER OCCURRED
USE e TO TOGGLE BETWEEN INDEX AND TIME (SEE STEP 11)
d USE u TO CHANGE SAMPLE OR TIME BEING VIEWED
FIGURE 5-15. Example of Snapshot for Engine Systems
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 107
Mode F3: Snapshot
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Single Code DTC Trigger in Snapshot mode may be different for select model year vehicles because DTCs are identified using the hexadecimal number system. To allow selection of the hexadecimal values for Snapshot trigger, use Table 5-1. An example is provided in Figure 5-16.
0 = 0
A = u0
1 = 1
B = u1
2 = 2
C = u2
3 = 3
D = u3
4 = 4
E = u4
5 = 5
F = u5
6 = 6 7 = 7 8 = 8 9 = 9
TABLE 5-1. Hexadecimal Values
To trigger a Snapshot on DTC number 3A: A. Select F1: SINGLE DTC. B. At the ENTER EEC DTC screen, press the 3 key. C. Press the u key. D. Press the 0 key. The character A is displayed. E. Press e to accept the Snapshot trigger on DTC 3A. F. The Snapshot triggers when the specific DTC occurs.
FIGURE 5-16. Example: Triggering a Snapshot on DTC
X If you select F2: MANUAL TRIG, the tester triggers the snapshot upon an , E , or ( keypress at any time. If you are t esting an NGC Engine System, the data list t o be captured in snapshot must also be selected.
NOTE
The Chrysler Service Manuals for 1989 to 1995 models do not list diagnostic trouble codes by number. To determine which diagnostic trouble code number to enter into the tester for snapshot trigger, consult Appendix B of this manual.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 108
Mode F3: Snapshot
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS FOR SET-UP PHASE 0 - 9
Select specific diagnostic trouble code.
) - @
Select trigger condition.
#
Replay data captured in Snapshot mode.
x
Return to Test Mode menu.
(
Select trigger point position.
To select Data Capture Phase of Snapshot Mode, do the following:
5. Once the trigger condition is specified, the tester starts saving diagnostic data in its memory while displaying the data list. See Viewing Data Parameters on page 78. 6. While the tester is waiting for a trigger, it is continuously storing engine data parameters and fault codes in its memory. The data is o rganized as a number of data samples. The value or state of each parameter as well as all fault codes are saved for each sample. If more than 36 samples occur before the trigger, the oldest data is discarded. The data display indicates the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right-hand corner of the display. While waiting for the selected trigger, the , E , ( or keys can always be used to force a tr igger. X 7. Once the trigger occurs, the tester continues to save data samples until its memory is full. To indicate that a trigger occurred, the tester makes a beep sound, and the data display replaces the flashing W with a fixed T. As soon as the memory is full, t he data capture terminates automatically and the tester goes on to the data display phase.
X 8. Pressing after the trigger has occurred terminates the Data Captur e phase early, and the Snapshot mode moves to the Data Display phase.
ACTIVE KEYS FOR DATA CAPTURE PHASE )
Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs.
!
Mark bottom displayed parameters fixed for creating your own data pairs.
*
Print most recently sampled data.
(
Manual trigger.
y , n
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
e
Manual trigger.
x
Manual trigger. Go to data display phase of Snapshot mode.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 109
Mode F3: Snapshot
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
To select Data Display Phase of Snapshot mode, do the following:
9. The Data Display phase begins with a number (initially zero) in the lower right hand corner of the display. The number zero indicates the time at which the trigger occurred. Select the data parameters to be displayed using Y and N ; see the Data List mode operating instructions.
NOTE During the Data Display phase, the fault codes present during each sample can be displayed by pressing @ .
10.Use the U and D keys to select the desired sample. An index is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the tester display. Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample; sample -1 is the sample immediately proceeding the trigger; sample +1 is immediately after the trigger; and so on. The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if enough time was not allowed for data capture before or after the trigger. The following keys can be used to move about more quickly in the data display phase:
$ : Display first (earliest) sample : Display trigger sample (0) %
^ : Display last (most recent) sample 11. Pressing E causes the sample time to be displayed instead of the sample index:
BATTERY VO LTAGE 12 VOLTS BRAKE SWITCH OPEN +16
e
Sample Index
e
BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 VOLTS BRAKE SWITCH OPEN +3.4
Sample Time
The sample time display gives the time in seconds (relative to the trigger sample) at which the tester received the currently displayed sample. For example, a sample time of +3.4 means the sample was received 3.4 seconds after the trigger sample. A sample time of -0.6 seconds means the sample was received 0.6 seconds before the tr igger. Pressing E causes the tester to toggle between the sample index and sample time displays. 12. The data parameters can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible pri nter. For instructions on connecting the printer to the tester and printing the data parameters, refer to the operator’s manual if you are using a Tech 1A or MTS 3100. If you are using a Tech 1, refer to the RS232C/IF Operator’s Manual. 13. When you are finished viewing the sampled data, press to return to trigger select. If you are X X finished with the SNAPSHOT mode, press again to return to the Test Mode menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 110
Mode F3: Snapshot
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS FOR DATA DISPLAY PHASE y , n
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
u , d
Scroll through selected samples.
, ! )
Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively.
@
Display diagnostic trouble codes for current sample.
$
Advance to first (earliest) sample.
%
Advance to trigger sample (sample 0).
^
Advance to last (most recent) sample.
e
Toggle between sample index and sample time display.
x
Return to Trigger Select menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 111
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS - ENGINE The On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Controls mode provides fast access to output controls supported by the vehicle OBD system on 1989 and newer Chrysler vehicles (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II). Most vehicle systems allow the tester to command an output or actuator device to turn on or off or allow PCM/TCM memory resets. The tester used with this software is capable of bidirectional communication that controls the device under test, or it can make the device under test change states by controlling the PCM/TCM input/ output electronics. The specific outputs that you can control appear in a Select Control menu unique to the vehicle selected. Providing quick and efficient diagnostic software tools to help diagnostic problems is the purpose of this mode. There are certain constraints to controlling some of the outputs. Some are determined by the vehicle controller, and some are determined by the tester. While controlling the outputs, the Data List parameters are displayed for most vehicles. The regular F0: DATA LIST key functions are available for these vehicles. For many output functions, the engine must be running before the control module allows an output to be controlled by the tester. For some output functions, the engine must be off before the output can be controlled.
NOTE Check and clear DTCs after performing output controls or tests. DTCs may be set when performing any output control or test.
SUBMODE F0: RPM CONTROL The following OBD control is only applicable to 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II). The RPM Control test allows you to remotely control engine RPM from the tester. RPM can be varied between approximately 900 and 2040 RPM. If an elevated RPM or diagnosis of t he AIS motor is required for any reason, this mode allows quick and easy control of the AIS motor.
CAUTION! CAUTION
This test should only be run with the parking brake on and wheels adequately blocked. Any other mode of operation is not recommended and is unsafe.
To select RPM Control, do the following:
1. Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by pressing $ . 2. Select RPM Control Test submode test from the OBD Controls menu by pressing ) . 3. Make sure the vehicle parking brake is engaged, the transmission is in park or neutral, the engine is running, and the drive wheels are secured, then press Y .
SET PARK BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS AND START ENGINE THEN PRESS [YES]
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 112
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
4. The tester initializes controlled RPM to the current value of RPM. Press the U to begin the RPM Control test. You can increase the engine RPM by pressing the U key or decrease RPM by pressing t he D key. Holding down either key causes the engine speed to change in the appropriate direction. The RPM can be controlled from approximately 900 to 2040 RPM.
Indicates RPM being controlled ENGINE SPEED 1024 RPM RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 737 RPM 1024
RPM control value
RPM Control with Parameter Display 5. While controlling RPM you can display EEC data parameters as in the Data List mode. The letters RPM appear at the end of line 2 of the display, and the currently commanded value of RPM is displayed at the end of line 4. Data parameters can be scrolled and fixed as in the Data List mode. 6. Refer to the tester Operator’s Manual for instructions on printing the data parameters.
X 7. Press to return to the OBD Controls menu and return control of the AIS motor to the EEC.
NOTE
900 to 2040 RPM is only the range of control allowed by the tester. Depending on current engine conditions, some engines may not achieve 2040 RPM, or may stall at 900 RPM. This does not necessarily indicate a faulty AIS motor. Engine design, age, wear, or other system faults (e.g., vacuum air leaks) may be the cause.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 113
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
SELECT CONTROL F0: RPM CONTROL F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: RESET MEMORY
)
SET PARK BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS AND START ENGINE THEN PRESS [YES]
y
RPM CONTROL = INCREASE RPM = DECREASE RPM
3 SECONDS OR PRESS u KEY
x
ENGINE SPEED 1042 RPM RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 8 90 RPM 904
USE u & d TO INCREASE OR DECREASE RPM
y n OTHER DATA LIST SCREENS
FIGURE 5-17. RPM Control
ACTIVE KEYS u
Increase engine speed by 8 RPM per key press (10 0 RPM for NGC Engine Systems).
d
Decrease engine speed by 8 RPM per key press (100 RPM for NGC Engine Systems).
, n y
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
) , !
Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs.
x
Terminate the RPM Control Test mode and return to the OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 114
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F1: ACTUATOR TEST The actuator tests available with the Chrysler application are different for F0: ENGINE and F1: TRANSMISSION systems. For F0: ENGINE system OBD Controls, the actuator tests are only applicable for 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L turbo II). Solenoid tests for the 4xRE transmission are list ed in this section of the manual. Refer t o the actuator list for available tests. The following OBD Controls are only applicable to 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II). Actuators can be set to one of two states: ON
Normal actuator state is overridden and actuator is forced ON.
NORMAL
Actuator control is returned to normal.
F0: ENGINE: The Actuator Test submode allows you to control a number of individual actuators. Only actuators applicable to the model selected appears in the A ctuator Tests menu. While controlling the actuators, the Data List parameters are displayed. All of the regular F0: Data List functions are available.
NOTE
When performing speed control actuator tests, speed control ON/OFF switch must be ON and foot must be off brake pedal (remember to set emergency brake).
To select Actuator test, do the following:
1. From the OBD Controls menu, select the Actuator test menu by pressing ! .
NOTE For F0: ENGINE the engine must be OFF before the EEC allows an actuator to be controlled by the tester.
2. After a three second prompt message, a menu of the actuators available for the vehicle you are testing appears. This menu can be scrolled up and down using the U and D keys, in a manner similar to scrolling the Test Mode menu. 3. To select an actuator to control, press the numeric keys displayed to the left of the desired actuator, then press E . For instance, if the actuator number on the left side of the display screen is 13, press 1 , then press 3 , then press E . It is not necessary for the actuator to be currently displayed for you to select it; any actuator can be selected from t he menu at any time. Once an actuator is selected, you can then begin controlling the state of that output. 4. A controlled actuator can be in one of two states: •
Press the U key to override control of the EEC controller and force the actuator ON. Most solenoids and relays are cycled on and off by the tester during the actuator test to prevent damage.
•
Press the D key to allow NORMAL EEC control. When the actuator is fi rst selected, it is also under normal EEC control.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 115
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Note that the actuator does not appear to change state if the commanded state is the same as the controlled state. For example, if the Check Engine Light is ON, and it is then commanded ON with the U key, its state does not change; it stays ON. 5. If you leave an actuator ON indefinitely, the EEC turns it off after seven minutes to prevent possible damage to the actuator. 6. The Data List parameters are displayed while an actuator is being controlled. A two or three character window is displayed at the end of line 2 of the displ ay. These characters serve as a reminder as to which actuator is being controlled. The last three characters of line 4 of the display reads ON if the state is being overridden by the tester. It is blank when the actuator is under normal control. 7. If the engine is running, or the actuator is not available for the selected engine (e.g., shift light in an automatic transmission), the tester may display:
ENG. RUNNING OR REQUESTED TEST NOT AVAILABLE [EXIT]
NOTE
In most cases, the tester displays only the actuators available for control in the vehicle you are testing. However, in some cases you are able to select an actuator for control that is not present in the vehicle. In this case, you may or may not see the preceding display.
8. Refer to the tester Operator’s Manual for instructions on printing the data parameters. 9. When you are finished controlling the output, press to return to the previous menu. When X X X is pressed, control of the selected actuator is returned to the EEC. Press again to return to the OBD Controls menu (F0: ENGINE only). ENTER ACTUATOR ID, PRESS ENTER THEN = ON = OFF
Control Operation Prompt
SELECT ACTUATOR 01: IGN. COIL 1 02: IGN. COIL 2 03: IGN. COIL 3
Sample Actuator Tests Menu
Indicates EGR being controlled ENGINE SPEED 0 RPM EGR ENG. IDLE SPEED 600 RPM ON
Sample Actuator Control with Data List (EGR Controlled On)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
ON
Indicates EGR being controlled ENGINE SPEED 0 RPM EGR ENG. IDLE SPEED 600 RPM
BLANK
Sample Actuator Control with Data List (EGR not Controlled On)
Page 116
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Table 5-2 lists engine actuators that can be selected for 1989 and later model SBEC and JTEC vehicles (not all engine actuators are available on all vehicles) except 1989 2.2L Turbo II:
01: IGN. COIL #1
25: SHIFT LAMP (4xRE)
49: FUEL PUMP RELAY
02: IGN. COIL #2
26: FUEL MONITOR (1989 only)
50: COOLANT TEMP GAUGE
03: IGN. COIL #3
27: VNT-1 SOL
51: OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
04: INJECTOR(S) #1
28: VNT-2 SOL.
52: GLOW PLUG RELAY
05: INJECTOR(S) #2
29: VNT-3 SOL.
53: FUEL TIMING SOLENOID
06: INJECTOR(S) #3
30: BALLAST BYPASS
54: O2 HEATER TEST
07: INJECTOR(S) #4
31: INTAKE HTR. 1
55: IAC MOTOR OPEN
08: INJECTOR(S) #5
32: INTAKE HTR. 2
56: IAC MOTOR SHUT
09: INJECTOR(S) #6
33: FUEL FLOW
57: LDP SOLENOID
10: AIS MOTOR
34: S/C PWR. RELAY
58: HIGH SPEED FAN #2
11: RADIATOR FAN
36: SURGE VALVE SOLENOID
59: DIESEL EGR
12: A/C CLUTCH
SOLENOID
60: HI SPD FAN 3
13: ASD RELAY
37: IGN. COIL #4
61: OVRDRIVE LAMP (4xRE)
14: CANISTER PURG
38: IGN. COIL #5
62: O2S SNSR BIAS
15: S/C SOLENOIDS
39: INJECTOR(S) #7
63: TRANS RLY TEST
16: ALT. FIELD
40: INJECTOR(S) #8
64: REV GEAR LCKT
17: TACH. OUTPUT
41: INJECTOR(S) #9
65: IGN. COIL #6
18: TCC SOLENOID (4xRE)
42: INJECTOR(S) #10
66: SRV SOLENOID
19: EGR SOLENOID
43: 2-3 GEAR LOCKOUT
67: AIR ASST SOL
20: WASTEGATE SOL
44: MANIFOLD TUNING
68: IGN. COIL #7
21: WASTEGATE 2
45: LOW SPEED FAN RELAY
69: IGN. COIL #8
22: BARO READ SOL
46: HIGH SPEED FAN RELAY
73: O2 HTR 1/1
23: AIR SWITCH SOL
47: S/C VENT SOL.
74: O2 HTR 2/1
24: OVERDRIVE SOL (4xRE)
48: S/C VACUUM SOL.
99: ALL SOL/RELAY
TABLE 5-2. Engine Actuators (1989 and Later)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 117
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Table 5-3 lists the actuator tests that are available on NGC Engine System ECUs. 01: INJ 1
11: LINEAR IAC
21: O2 1/1 HTR
02: INJ 2
12: ALT. FIELD
22: O2 2/1 HTR
03: INJ 3
13: FAN RELAY 1
23: O2 1/2 HTR
04: INJ 4
14: FAN RELAY 2
24: O2 2/2 HTR
05: INJ 5
15: A/C CLUTCH R
25: MTV SOL
06: INJ 6
16: ASD RELAY
26: SRV SOL
07: INJ 7
17: FUEL PMP RLY
27: DBL STRT OVR
08: INJ 8
18: S/C VAC SOL
28: WASTGATE SOL
09: PROP PRG SOL
19: S/C VENT SOL
29: NVLD SOL
10: EGR SOL
20: S/C SERVO
TABLE 5-3. Actuator tests for EGC Engine System ECUs In some cases, Chrysler injector actuator tests may not be numbered in reference to cylinder location. Refer to a service manual for actual cylinder and injector circuit locations. For example, on earlier 3.3L and 3.8L V6 SBEC engines, INJ 1 circuit test is actually testing the injector on cylinder number 2.
INJECTOR TEST
CYLINDER LOCATION
Injector(s) #1
Cyl. 2
Injector(s) #2
Cyl. 1
Injector(s) #3
Cyl. 4
Injector(s) #4
Cyl. 3
Injector(s) #5
Cyl. 6
Injector(s) #6
Cyl. 5
TABLE 5-4. 3.3L and 3.8L Injector/Cylinder Reference Chart
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 118
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
OBD CONTROLS F0: RPM CONTROL F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: RESET MEMORY
!
CONTROL OPERATION PROMPT
ENTER ACTUATOR TEST ID, THEN = ON = OFF 3 SECONDS OR PRESS u KEY
ACTUATOR TEST 01: IGN. COIL 1 02: IGN. COIL 2 03: IGN. COIL 3
d
x
u
ACTUATOR MENUS
ACTUATOR TEST 14: CANISTER PURGE 15: S/C SOLENOIDS 16: ALT. FIELD
x
FOR EXAMPLE, TO SELECT ALTERNATOR FIELD PRESS 1 , 6 THEN e .
u
ENGINE SPEED 2850 RPM ALT ENG. IDLE SPEED 890 RPM ON
d
ON = ACTUATOR CONTROLLED ON (ONLY AFTER u IS PRESSED)
u d TOGGLES ACTUATOR BETWEEN ON AND NORMAL EEC CONTROL
u x
ENGINE SPEED 2850 RPM ALT ENG. IDLE SPEED 890 RPM
BLANK = ACTUATOR NOT CONTROLLED ON
y n OTHER DATA LIST SCREENS
FIGURE 5-18. Actuator Test
ACTIVE KEYS - ( )
Specify actuator to control.
u
Turn selected actuator on.
d
Restore normal EEC control of actuator.
, n y
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
) , !
Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your o wn data pairs.
e
Begin controlling specified actuator.
x
Exit from Activator Tests mode and return control of selected output to the EEC.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 119
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F2: RESET MEMORY The following Reset Memory functions are applicable to most 1990 and later engine systems. Not all selections are available for all engine systems.
F0: Adaptive Fuel This submode allows you to reset the Adaptive Fuel setting after a repair has been made. For instance, if a rich fuel condition exists, the adaptive fuel parameter changes to dilute the mixture to a normal air/fuel ratio. After the cause of the rich fuel condition is repaired, the adaptive fuel parameter memory should be reset to its nominal setting. This reset is applicable to 1990 and later vehicles.
F1: AIS Counter This submode allows you to reset the AIS Counter to a nominal position after a repair has been made. The AIS Counter attempts to compensate for abnormal air/fuel ratio readings. For example, vacuum leaks cause the AIS motor to fully extend. The EEC remembers the previous motor position and sets the motor in the fully extended position at each start. After the vacuum leaks are repaired, this procedure should be performed. This reset is applicable to 1990 and later vehicles.
F2: Minimum Throttle This submode allows you to reset the Minimum Throttle mem ory after a repair has been made. For instance, if the Throttle Position Sensor is replaced and the Minimum Throttle Positi on reading in the EEC memory is different, this mode resets the minimum value to 1.25 volts. The Minimum Throttle memory then changes as the EEC learns the new minimum throttle position. This reset is applicable to 1990 and later vehicles.
F3: Cam/Crank This reset is only applicable to 1995 and later 2.0L Cirrus, Stratus, Breeze, and Neon vehicles. F0: Sync
The Sync submode allows you to reset the lost Cam, Crank, and Sync status w ithin the last 50 vehicle starts. This procedure is performed on the applicable vehicles when a timing belt only has been replaced. F1: Relearn
This submode allows the engine controller to relearn and write to memory the camshaft and crankshaft alignment after a timing belt or related hardware have been serviced. The re-learn should only be done if any of the following items have been serviced: Camshaft, Camshaft position sensor, Target Magnet, Camshaft Sprocket, Crankshaft, Crankshaft Sprocket, Cylinder Block, Cylinder Head, Head Gasket, PCM, Tensioner, Timing Belt, Water Pump.
F4: Door Locks This submode allows you to change the automatic door lock setting that is stored in the PCM memory of the vehicle. You can enable or disable the automatic door locking feature that occurs when t he vehicle reaches 15 miles per hour. This reset is applicable to 1994-97 LH and 1995-97 JA model vehicles.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 120
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
F5: Flex Fuel % This submode allows you to reset the Flex Fuel Percentage to zero following a service diagnostic drain/refill event. It allows for the Flex Fuel Vehicle sensor to re-learn the percentage of ethanol content in the fuel.
F6: Misfire Adapt This submode allows you to reset the Misfire Adaptive Numerator Values.
F7: OBD Data This submode allows you to reset the On-Board Diagnostic data stored in ECU memory. OBD data includes DTCs, Freeze Frame Data, 1 Trip Failures, OBD II Readiness, Good Trips, and Warm-Up Counters.
F8: All Values This submode allows you to reset the memory for OBD Data, all Adaptive Memory Cells, TPS Minimum Learned Voltage, Stored Fuel Shut-Off Reason, Engine Run and Stall Time, Misfir e Adaptive Numerator Values, and AIS Adaptives. To select Reset Memory, do the following:
1. The vehicle must have the Key ON and the Engine OFF before attempting the reset. 2. Select the OBD CONTROLS mode from the Test Mode menu by pressing $ . 3. Select Reset Memory submode from the OBD Controls menu by pressing @ . 4. Select the desired reset function by pressing the key listed in front of the reset description. 5. If the reset was unsuccessful, the tester displays a screen that notifies the user that the reset was denied. Press the key to return to the Reset Memory menu. X 6. If the reset was successful, the tester displays a reset confirmation screen then return to the Reset Memory menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 121
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$ SELECT CONTROL F0: RPM CONTROL F1: ACTUATOR TEST F2: RESET MEMORY
@ SELECT CONTROL F0: ADAPTIVE FUEL F1: AIS COUNTER F2: MIN THROTTLE F3: CAM/CRANK F4: DOOR LOCKS F5: FLEX FUEL % F6: MISFIRE ADAPT F7: OBD DATA F8: ALL VALUES
) X
xxxxxxxxxxxxx BEING RESET
RESET DENIED
RESET COMPLETE
x or 3 Seconds xxxxxxxxxxxxxx RESET DENIED [EXIT]
xxxxxxxxxxxxx RESET
FIGURE 5-19. Example of Reset Memory
ACTIVE KEYS @ X
Select Reset Memory from the Select Control menu. Return to the Select Control menu for OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 122
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F3: ASD FUEL SYSTEM TEST The following OBD Control is only applicable to 1990 and later SBEC and JTEC models selected under F0: ENGINE systems. The ASD Fuel System test mode is similar to the ASD Actuator test, but rather than cycling the ASD relay, it is turned on continuously to allow diagnosis of fuel system problems. To select Fuel System test, do the following:
1. The vehicle must have the Engine Off and the Key On. 2. Select the OBD CONTROLS mode from the Select Mode menu by pressing $ . 3. Select the ASD FUEL submode test from the OBD Controls menu by pressing # . 4. If the engine is running or the test is not available for the vehicle being tested, the tester displays ENG. X RUNNING OR REQUESTED TEST NOT AVAILABLE [EXIT]. Press to return to the OBD Controls menu. 5. If the ASD relay is turned on, the tester displays the Data List screens and ASD is displayed at the end of the second line. The Data List may be scrolled by using the Y and N keys. You may now proceed with fuel system diagnosis. 6. When the test is completed, pressing turns the ASD relay off and return the tester screen to the X OBD Controls menu.
CONTROL MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
SELECT CONTROL F3: ASD FUEL TEST F4: MIN AIR IDLE F9: MORE
# x
x
ENG. RUNNING OR REQUESTED TEST NOT AVAILABLE [EXIT]
x
ENGINE SPEED 2850 RPM ASD ENG. IDLE SPEED 890 RPM ON
Indicates ASD relay is turned on.
Y N OTHER DATA LIST SCREENS
FIGURE 5-20. ASD Fuel System Test
ACTIVE KEYS # X , N Y
Select ASD Fuel Test from the Select Control menu. Return to OBD Controls menu. Scroll through displayed data parameters.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 123
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F4: MINIMUM AIRFLOW IDLE SPEED TEST TEST The following OBD Control is only applicable to 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II) selected under F0: ENGINE systems. Not all engine systems support this test. The Minimum Airflow Idle Speed function of the EEC causes the EEC to move the AIS motor to the closed position and provide fuel enrichment. The tester displays the resulting RPM . To select Minimum Airflow Idle Speed test, do the following:
1. Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by by pressing $ . 2. From the OBD Controls menu, menu, press $ to select MIN AIR IDLE. to 3. The tester commands the Minimum Airflow Idle Speed EEC function and displays the engine RPM. Wait 30 sec. for the RPM to stabilize before reading RPM. MINIMUM AIRFLOW IDLE SPEED 720 RPM
4. Press Press to to return t o the Test Mode menu. X On some Chrysler applications, normal engine idle speed may not be resumed after exiting the Minim um Airflow Idle Speed test. In this case, depress the throttle slightly and release, or cycle the ignition key (turn engine off and then restart).
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
SELECT CONTROL F3: ASD FUEL TEST F4: MIN AIR IDLE F9: MORE
$
MINUMUM AIRFLOW IDLE SPEED 720 RPM
x
FIGURE 5-21. 5-21. Minimum Airflow Airflow Idle Speed Speed Test Test
ACTIVE KEYS $ x
Select Minimum Airflow Idle Speed from the Select Control menu. Return to OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 124
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F5: FUEL INJECTOR KILL TEST The following OBD Control is only applicable to the 1994 LH body, the 1995 LH and JA bodies, and all 1996 and newer vehicles. The Injector Kill Test mode allows you to manually shut off each individual fuel injector. This mode is used to isolate weak or non-contributing cylinders by effectively disconnecting the fuel injector from the PCM. Injector Kill Test is not necessarily a test of the fuel injector but rather a test of the contributing cylinder. By shutting off individual injectors and monitoring the drop in engine speed, the performance of each of the cylinders can be gauged.
NOTE Each fuel injector can only be shut off for a time period of 10 seconds. After 10 seconds, control of the fuel injector is returned to the PCM.
To select Fuel Injector Kill test, do the following:
1. Press Press $ to select OBD CONTROL from the Select Mode menu. to 2. Press Press % to select INJECTOR KILL TEST from the OBD Control menu. to 3. The tester instructs you to set the parking brake, block wheels, wheels, start engine, turn off accessories, and place transmission in Park or Neutral. These These screens are passed by pressing E . If vehicle does not meet the required conditions, the test does not allow you to continue and displays the necessary conditions. You You are then returned to the OBD Control menu. 4. Instructions are given as how to control the fuel injector, injector, then press E . 5. Use the the ! - ) keys to select the fuel injector to control. (F1=Injector 1, F2=Injector 2, … , keys F0=Injector 10). After selecting the fuel injector, the tester screen displays the selected injector, the control status of the injector, and the engine speed. On particular vehicles, the data list may be available for display during the test. 6. Press Press D to to shut off the selected fuel injector. OFF is displayed in the l ower right hand corner. The shut X off fuel injector automatically is re-enabled after 10 seconds. Pressing U , , or a new fuel injector returns the disabled injector to normal operating condition. By selecting a new injector to control, the previous injector is returned to normal operating condit ion and the newly selected injector is displayed on the screen ready for control.
X 7. Press Press when you are done with t he Injector Kill Test. Instructions are displayed describing how to when exit the test. DTCs may be set after completing the test. Check and erase any DTCs.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 125
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
OBD CONTROL F3: ASD FUEL TEST F4: MIN AIR IDLE F5: INJ KILL TEST
%
SET PARK BRAKE, BLOCK WHEELS, START ENGINE, [ENTER]
e
TURN ACC. OFF, PLACE TRANS IN PARK OR NEUTRAL [ENTER]
e
If necessary conditions not met.
TO PERFORM FUEL INJ. KILL TEST THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
D U MUST BE MET: ECT = 180° - 230°F TPS = MIN TPS VSS = 0 MPH
INJECTOR CONTROL = INJECTOR OFF = NORMAL STATE [ENTER]
D
e
U P/N SW=P OR N TARGET IDLE= +/–300 RPM [EXIT]
INJECTOR: 1 STATUS: NORMAL ENGINE RPM: 1000 , , U X 10 sec
INJECTOR: 1 STATUS: OFF ENGINE RPM: 923
SELECT INJECTOR: F1: INJECTOR 1 : F8: INJECTOR 8
d
x
TURN KEY ON. DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO TEST. CHECK AND ERASE. [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-22. 5-22. Example Example of Fuel Injector Injector Kill Test Test
ACTIVE KEYS %
Select Injector Kill Test from OBD Control menu.
u
Return fuel injector to normal operating condition.
d
Shut off selected fuel injector during test.
! - )
Select fuel injector for control during Injector Kill Test. (F0=Injector (F0=Injector 10)
x
Return fuel injector to normal operating condition under control of the PCM. Return to Injector Kill Test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 126
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F6: PURGE TEST The following Purge test applies to all 1996 and newer vehicles with gasoline engines. The PURGE TEST mode allows you t o manually control purge flow at the purge valve. You are allowed to control purge flow while viewing desired parameters in data list mode. On specific 1998 and newer passenger car vehicles, you are allowed to control the amount of purge purge by 10% increments. If control of the Purge test belongs to the user, the tester returns control to the PCM after 30 seconds. To select Purge test, do the following:
1. Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by by pressing $ . 2. Press Press ^ to select PURGE TEST from the OBD Control menu. to 3. Press Press ) , ! , @ to select the Purge test of your choice. to 4. The tester instructs you to inspect all vacuum lines and check for proper routing and then describes the keys necessary to perform the test. Press e . 5. Press Press u to begin control of the Purge test while viewing parameters in data list mode. Press d to key key or key key to return purge control to the PCM. You can increase or decrease purge flow by 10% x increments with u and and d on selected 1998 and newer passenger car vehicles. on 6. Press Press from the PCM controlled purge test to exit the test and return to the Purge menu. from x S
ACTIVE KEYS ^
Select Purge Vapors Test from OBD Control menu.
u
Block purge flow to intake manifold. Purge vapors to intake manifold. Increase purge flow by 10% increments.
d
Return control of purge solenoid to PCM. Decrease purge flow by 10% increments.
, , n y
Scroll through parameters in the data list.
x
Return purge solenoid to normal operating condition under control of the PCM. Return to Purge Test menu.
K
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 127
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
SELECT CONTROL F6:PURGE TEST
^
SELECT CONTROL F0: BLOCK F1: FLOW F2: VARY PURGE
)
!
@
INSPECT VACUUM LINES AND CHECK FOR PROPER ROUTING. [ENTER]
)
= BLOCK PURGE = NORMAL [ENTER]
! Selected Vehicles Only
= PURGE VAPORS = NORMAL [ENTER]
e
SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX%
SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX% BLK
[ENTER]
e
SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX%
U D
= INCREASE PURGE = DECREASE PURGE
e
SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX%
U
U
D SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX% FLW
SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX% 0%
U D SHORT TERM ADAPT XX% LONG TERM ADAPT XX% 10%
FIGURE FIGURE 5-23. 5-23. Purge Purge Test Test
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 128
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F7: EGR TEST The following EGR test applies to select 1996 and newer engine systems. The EGR TEST mode allows you to manually control the block or flow of exhaust gas recirculation to the intake manifold. You are allowed to control EGR while viewing data parameters in data list mode. On specific 1998 and newer vehicles you are allowed to control t he amount of EGR flow by 10% increments. I f control of the EGR Test belongs to the user, the tester returns control to the PCM after 30 seconds. To select EGR test, do the following:
1. Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by pressing $ . 2. Press & to select EGR TEST from the OBD Control menu. 3. Press ) , ! , @ to select the EGR test of your choice. 4. The tester instructs you to check all hoses and tubes and make sure the engine is running and warmed. The tester defines the necessary keys to perform the test. Press e .
x 5. Press u to begin the EGR test while viewing data list mode. Press d or to return EGR control to the PCM. You can increase or decrease EGR flow by 10% increments with u and d on certain 1998 and newer vehicles. Data list mode is available during the EGR test to monitor the vehicle’s response. x 6. Press to return to the EGR menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 129
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
SELECT CONTROL F7: EGR TEST F8: BASE TIMING F9: MORE
&
SELECT CONTROL F0: BLOCK EGR F1: FLOW EGR F2: VARY EGR
)
!
@
CHECK ALL HOSES, TUBES. ENGINE SHOULD BE WARM & RUNNING. [ENTER]
)
! Selected Vehicles Only
= TO BLOCK EGR = NORMAL EGR
= TO FLOW EGR = NORMAL EGR
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
e
VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1
VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1 BLK
[ENTER]
e
VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1
U , , D x or 30 sec.
= INCREASE FLOW = DECREASE FLOW
e
VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1
U , , D x or 30 sec. VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1 FLW
U , , D x or 30 sec. VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1 0%
U , , D x or 30 sec. VAC (kPa,in Hg) 68 20.1 BARO (kPa, in Hg) 101 30.1 10%
FIGURE 5-24. EGR Test
ACTIVE KEYS &
Select EGR Test from OBD Control menu.
u
Block EGR flow to intake manifold. Flow EGR to intake manifold. Increase EGR flow by 10% increments.
d
Return control of EGR solenoid to PCM. Decrease EGR flow by 10% increments.
- n y
Scroll through parameters in the data list.
x
Return control of EGR solenoid to PCM. Return to Purge Test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 130
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F8: BASE TIMING The following test is only available on selected 1991-95 models with engines that have distributor ignition (DI) systems with adjustable ignition timing (excluding 2.5L Dakota and engines with a crankshaft position sensor). In this test, the tester commands the SBEC module to eli minate spark scatter ignition firing whil e the engine is running at idle. When spark scatter is eliminated, the engine is running in base timing mode. If an engine supports this test, disconnection of the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is not required when checking ignition timing. Connect a strobe timing lamp and perform all steps necessary to check timing, except for disconnection of the ECT sensor. Additionally, because disconnection of the ECT sensor is not required, a DTC is not set. To select Base Timing, do the following:
1. Set parking brake and block drive wheels. 2. Start warm engine and allow to idle. 3. From the Test Mode menu, press $ to enter the OBD Controls mode. 4. From the OBD Controls menu, press * to enter the Base Timing mode. 5. The tester prompts you to perform necessary safety preparation steps. 6. A status screen indicating base timing test enabled is displayed. This is followed by an information screen that has engine RPM and spark advance displayed on the tester. Both engine RPM and spark advance (base ignition timing value) are actual values as input to the SBEC controller. At this time use a strobe timing lamp to verify base ignition timing. If it appears that the groove in the balancer is still moving back and forth (indicating spark scatter operation), wait a few seconds for the SBEC controller to stop all other routines. At that time, the balancer groove stops moving back and forth and base timing can be checked. Chrysler engines with EI (distributorless ignition) may not be equipped with timing tabs on engine. Refer to Chrysler service manuals for further information. 7. If during the test, the accelerator pedal is depressed or the vehicle is placed in gear, a message indicating the test is invalid is displayed.
X 8. When you are finished performing the Base Timing test, press from the information screen. When this is performed, control of ignition timing is returned to the SBEC controller and spark scatter ignition firing is resumed.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 131
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE: F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$
SELECT CONTROL F7: EGR TEST F8: BASE TIMING F9: MORE
*
SET PARK BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS AND START ENGINE THEN PRESS [YES]
y
TURN ACC OFF, PLACE TRANS IN PARK OR NEUT. THEN PRESS [YES]
x OR 3 Sec.
y REQUESTED TEST NOT AVAILABLE [EXIT]
BASE TIMING TEST ENABLED
BASE TIMING TEST INVALID DUE TO OPEN THROTTLE [EXIT]
3 Sec.
x
BASE TIMING TEST INVALID DUE TO TRANS IN GEAR [EXIT]
x
SET BASE TIMING ENG RPM = XXXX SPK ADV = XXX DONE? [EXIT]
x
FIGURE 5-25. Base Timing
ACTIVE KEYS *
Select Base Timing from OBD Control menu.
y
View next screen of text.
x
Return to normal operation. Return to OBD Control menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 132
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F9: MORE Submode F1: Reset EMR Lamp (Minivans/Trucks only) The following OBD Controls are only applicable to 1989 and later SBEC and JTEC minivans and trucks selected under F0: ENGINE systems. On 1989 and later model trucks, the Emissions Main tenance Reminder (EMR) lamp on the dashboard lights up at a predetermined odometer setting. The lamp can be turned off by using the EMR Lamp Reset procedure. To select EMR Lamp Reset, do the following:
1. From the Test Mode menu, press $ to enter the OBD Controls mode. 2. For 1989 models make sure the engine is not running. 3. From the OBD Controls menu, select MORE by pressing ( to view additional OBD controls. 4. From the OBD Controls menu, press ! to enter the EMR Lamp Reset procedure.
NOTE Engine must not be running.
5. The tester commands the EEC to turn off the EMR Lamp and display the following screen for two seconds: EMISSION MAINTENANCE REMINDER LAMP BEING RESET
6. If the tester senses the EMR Lamp has been successfully reset, it displays the following, then return to the OBD Controls menu. EMISSION MAINTENANCE REMINDER LAMP RESET
7. If the tester displays the screen below, it has received an unexpected response from the controller or the controller has denied the EMR lamp reset. Check the status of the EMR lamp. The lamp may have been successfully reset even though the tester received the unexpected response. If the EMR lamp is still illuminated, the reset request has been denied by the controller due to a fault. RESET COMMANDED. IF UNSUCCESSFUL, SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL [EXIT]
X Press to return to OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 133
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$ SELECT CONTROL F6: PURGE F7: EGR TEST F9: MORE
( SELECT CONTROL F1: RESET EMR F2: UPDATE BARO. F3: PROGRAM VIN
! EMISSION MAINTENANCE REMINDER LAMP BEING RESET
X
X
EMISSION MAINTENANCE REMINDER LAMP RESET
RESET COMMANDED. IF UNSUCCESSFUL, SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-26. EMR Lamp Reset
ACTIVE KEYS !
Select Reset EMR Lamp from the Select Control menu.
(
Select more tests.
x
Return to OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 134
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Submode F2: Update Barometer The following test is only available for 1989 and later SBEC and JTEC turbocharged models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II and Cummins Diesel Truck) selected under F0: ENGINE systems. In this mode the tester energizes the Barometric Pressure Read Solenoid and the barometric pressure is read by the EEC. To select Update Barometer, do the following:
1. Select OBD Controls from the Select Mode menu by pressing $ . 2. Select MORE from the OBD Controls menu by pressing ( to view additional OBD controls. 3. From the OBD Controls menu press @ to select UPDATE BAROMETER. 4. The tester displays RUN ENGINE AT IDLE SPEED. Start the engine and let it idle. 5. The Barometric Pressure Read Solenoid is activated and the current barometric pressure is determined. BAROMETRIC READ SOLENOID UPDATE BEING PERFORMED is displayed on the tester screen. 6. If the barometric pressure cannot be updated, the tester informs you BAROMETRIC READ SOLENOID UPDATE DENIED [EXIT]. Press the key to return to OBD Controls menu. X 7. When the barometer reading has been updated the tester displays BAROMETRIC READ SOLENOID UPDATE COMPLETE [EXIT].
X 8. Press to return to the OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 135
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$ SELECT CONTROL F6: PURGE TEST F7: EGR TEST F9: MORE
( SELECT CONTROL F1: RESET EMR F2: UPDATE BARO. F3: PROGRAM VIN
@
RUN ENGINE AT IDLE SPEED
BAROMETRIC READ SOLENOID UPDATE BEING PERFORMED
Update Denied
Update Complete
x
x
BAROMETRIC READ SOLENOID UPDATE DENIED [EXIT]
BAROMETRIC READ SOLENOID UPDATE COMPLETE [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-27. Update Barometer
ACTIVE KEYS @
Select Update Barometer from the Select Control menu.
(
Select more tests.
x
Return to OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 136
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Submode F3: Program VIN The following test is supported for all 1996 and newer vehicles. This procedure allows you to reprogram a new Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with the vehicle’s original identification number (VIN). When replacing a PCM with Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM), this procedure must be performed in order for the vehicle to operate. If you attempt to change a VIN that is correctly stored in a PCM, the PCM does not allow you to change it. If the VIN stored in the PCM is not valid, you are allowed to correct it. To select Program VIN, do the following:
1. Select OBD Controls from the Select Mode menu by pressing $ . 2. Select MORE from the Select Control menu by pressing ( . 3. Select PROGRAM VIN from the Select Control menu by pressing # . 4. Read the test information that is displayed on the t ester screens. You may scroll through the screens using the up and down arrows. 5. Once you have read the information, press e to begin VIN programming. The PCM does not allow you to change the VIN if it is determined to be valid. 6. Enter the new VIN or correct an invalid VIN using the different arrow keys. 7. The PCM notifies you whether the procedure was successful or unsuccessful.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 137
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: I NFORMATION
$ SELECT CONTROL F9: MORE
( SELECT CONTROL F3: PROGRAM VIN
# Programming VIN should only be performed when replacing the PCM. Be careful to enter the correct VIN. [ENTER]
e = SCROLL = LEFT/RIGHT ENTER = PROGRAM [ENTER]
e
User selects VIN characters
VIN: 00000000000 000000
e VIN 1B7GL23X3VS 249740 CORRECT? [YES/NO]
y
Programming VIN Please wait...
VIN Programming not successful. [ENTER]
VIN Programming successful. [ENTER]
e
e Turn key OFF. Turn key ON and start engine to complete. [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-28. Program VIN
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 138
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS u , d
Scroll through characters.
, r l
Move to next VIN character.
e
Program VIN.
x
Return to OBD Control menu.
Submode F4: Linear IAC The following Linear Intake Air Control test applies to the 2001 and newer PL (Neon) and RS (Caravan, Voyager, and Town & Country) vehicles with SBEC engine systems. The Linear Intake Air Control test allows you to manually control the position of the IAC valve from completely open to completely closed. You are allowed to control Linear IAC with the Key On and the Engine Off while viewing the IAC Current input to the PCM. You are allowed to control IAC position in 1% increments. Control of the IAC is returned to the PCM after 5 minutes. To select Linear IAC, do the following:
1. Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by pressing $ . 2. Select MORE from the OBD Controls menu by pressing ( . 3. Select Linear IAC test from the OBD Controls menu by pressing $ . 4. Press ) , ! , @ to select the Linear IAC test of your choice. 5. The tester displays define the functional keys. Press e . 6. Press u to begin the test. Press d or EXIT to return control to the PCM. You can increase or decrease the IAC valve position by 1% increments.
x 7. Press to return to the Linear IAC menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 139
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
$ SELECT CONTROL F9: MORE
( SELECT CONTROL F3: PROGRAM VIN F4: LINEAR IAC
$ SELECT CONTROL F0: FULLY OPEN F1: FULLY CLOSED F2: VARIABLE
) ! @ TO PERFORM THIS TEST, THE ENGINE MUST BE OFF. [ENTER]
)
= FULLY CLOSED = NORMAL
= FULLY OPEN = NORMAL
= INCREASE = DECREASE
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
e
e
e LINEAR IAC STATUS: NORMAL IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
LINEAR IAC STATUS: NORMAL IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
LINEAR IAC STATUS: NORMAL IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
, , D X
@
!
u
, , D X
u
u
or 5 minutes
or 5 minutes
LINEAR IAC STATUS:OPEN IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
LINEAR IAC STATUS: 0% IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
LINEAR IAC STATUS: CLOSED IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
, , D X
u
or 5 minutes
LINEAR IAC STATUS: 1% IAC CURRENT (mA) XXX
FIGURE 5-29. Linear IAC Test Example
ACTIVE KEYS u
Fully Open IAC Valve. Fully Close IAC Valve. Open Valve by 1% increments.
d
Return control of IAC to PCM. Close Valve by 1% increments.
x
Return control of IAC to PCM. Return to Linear IAC menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 140
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS - TRANSMISSION SUBMODE F0: A/T OUTPUTS Submode F0-F3: LR, 2-4, UD, OD Solenoid—41TE, 42LE, 42RLE Submode F0-F5: LRCC, 2C, UD, OD, 4C, MS Solenoid—45RFE The following solenoid tests are only applicable to 1988 and later 41TE/AE (A604), 42LE (A606), 45RFE, and 42RLE EATX controllers which communicate using the CCD protocol or the PCI Bus data link.
NOTE
Solenoid tests for the 4xRE transmission are not listed in this section of the manual. Refer to Submode F1: Actuator Test on page 115 for support of 4xRE solenoid tests.
Depending on the selected solenoid, you can remotely control the transmission shift solenoid(s). Once activated, the tester commands the EATX controller to cycle the selected solenoid ON/OFF. While controlling the solenoid, Data List parameters are displayed. All of the regular F0: Data List functions are available. All solenoid tests can be performed with Key On, Engine Off (KOEO) or Key On, Engine Running (KOER). Testing solenoids in a KOEO condition is useful when testing solenoid electrical circuits since the danger from wheel rotation is eliminated (In KOEO testing, all solenoids are cycled 3 seconds ON, 3 seconds OFF). Testing solenoids in a KOER condition is useful when testing solenoid electrical circuits and transmission hydraulics. However, exercise care when performing KOER solenoid tests since you now are commanding the transmission into a drive gear and wheel rotation can occur (remember to raise and support the wheels when performing KOER solenoid tests). Depress the brake pedal and place the shift lever in the park position before exiting the solenoid test. The solenoid can be in one of two states: ON Tester overrides EATX control and begins solenoid test. OFF Turns off solenoid test and solenoid control is returned to EATX controller.
CAUTION! CAUTION
Prior to performing an EATX Solenoid test, make sure drive wheels are raised and supported. Before exiting any solenoid actuator test, depress the brake pedal and place the shift lever in the PARK position. Further, carefully follow the instructions that appear on the tester display and those found in Chrysler service diagnostic manuals.
To select Solenoid Tests, do the following:
1. Select the transmission solenoid you wish to test from the A/T Outputs menu by pressing the appropriate function key. 2. If you are testing with the engine running, follow the messages that are displayed on the tester screen. You are reminded to set the parking brake, r aise and support the vehicle, depress the brake pedal, and
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 141
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
select transmission gear overdrive range. If you are testing with the engine off, simply press E to pass the reminder screens. 3. Once the tester displays the data list you are ready to begin the solenoid test. An actuator can be in one of two controlled states: •
Press the U key to override contr ol of the EATX controller and force the solenoid t est on. The solenoid is cycled on and off by the tester during the actuator test to prevent damage.
•
Press the D key to return the solenoid test to normal EATX control.
4. If you leave the solenoid ON indefinitely, the EATX controller turns it off after thr ee minutes to prevent possible damage to the actuator. 5. The data list parameters are displayed while the solenoid actuator is being controlled. A two or three character message is displayed at end of line 2 of the display. These characters serve as a reminder as to which solenoid is being controlled. The last three characters of line 4 of the display reads ON if the normal state is being overridden by the tester.
X 6. When you are finished performing the solenoid test, turn the solenoid ON then press . When this is performed, control of the selected solenoid is returned to the EATX controller.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 142
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT SOLENOID FROM TEST MENU
LIFT DRIVE TIRES OFF GROUND AND SET PARK BRAKE. [ENTER]
e
PRESS AND HOLD BRAKE PEDAL, MOVE SHIFT LEVER TO OVERDRIVE [ENTER]
e
TURBINE SPEED XXXX RPM 2-4 OUTPUT SPEED XXXX RPM
u
NOTE: Depress brake pedal before commanding Solenoid Test "ON"
TURBINE SPEED XXXX RPM 2-4 OUTPUT SPEED XXXX RPM ON
d
Command Solenoid Test "OFF"
TURBINE SPEED XXXX RPM 2-4 OUTPUT SPEED XXXX RPM OFF
u
Command Solenoid Test "ON"
TURBINE SPEED XXXX RPM 2-4 OUTPUT SPEED XXXX RPM ON
x
NOTE: Exit test with Solenoid Test commanded "ON"
DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL, SHIFT TO PARK
FIGURE 5-30. Example of Performing a Solenoid Test
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 143
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
ACTIVE KEYS )
Selects LR Solenoid actuator test; selects LRCC Solenoid actuator test.
!
Selects 2-4 Solenoid actuator test; selects 2C Solenoid actuator test.
@
Selects UD Solenoid actuator test.
#
Selects OD Solenoid actuator test.
$
Selects 4C Solenoid actuator test.
%
Selects MS Solenoid actuator test.
u
Turns solenoid actuator on.
d
Turns solenoid actuator off.
y , n
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
, ! )
Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your o wn data pairs.
x
Exit from solenoid actuator test (solenoid test commanded on).
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 144
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Submode F0-3: Solenoid A, B, C The following solenoid tests are only applicable to the 1997-2001 Jeep Cherokee AW4 (Aisin) ECU which communicates on and is diagnosed with the CCD Bus. Depending on the test that you select, the solenoid tests allow you to remotely control the transmission shift solenoid(s). Once activated, the tester commands the AW4 ECU to cycle the selected solenoid ON/OFF. While controlling the solenoid, Data List parameters are displayed. All of the regular F0: Data List functions are available. All solenoid tests can be performed with Key On, Engine Off (KOEO) or Key On, Engine Running (KOER). Testing solenoids in a KOEO condition is useful when testing solenoid electrical circuits since the danger from wheel rotation is eliminated. Testing solenoids in a KOER condition is useful when testing solenoid electrical circuits and transmission hydraulics. However, exercise caution when performing KOER solenoid tests since you now are commanding the transmission into a drive gear and wheel rotation can occur. Depress the brake pedal and place the shift lever in the PARK position before exiting the solenoid test. The solenoid can be in one of two states: ON
Tester overrides AW4 control and begins solenoid test.
OFF
Turns off solenoid test and solenoid control is returned to AW4 ECU.
CAUTION! CAUTION
Prior to performing a solenoid test, follow directions displayed on the tester screen. Before exiting any solenoid actuator test, depress the brake pedal and place the shift lever in the PARK position. Further, carefully follow the instructions found in Chrysler service diagnostic manuals.
To select Solenoid tests (Jeep Cherokee), do the following:
1. Select the transmission solenoid you wish to test from the A/T Outputs menu by pressing the appropriate function key: F0: Solenoid A (1-2 and 3-4) F1: Solenoid B (2-3) F2: Solenoid C (TCC) 2. Follow the messages that are displayed on the tester screen. You are reminded to block drive wheels, place shift lever in park or neutral, and keep brake pedal depressed during activation. If the above safety messages are not followed, the test is aborted. 3. Once the tester displays the data list, you are ready to begin the solenoid test. The tester automatically begins to cycle the solenoid to the ON and OFF position. •
Press the U key to override control of the AW4 controller and force the solenoid to cycle ON and OFF.
•
Press the D key to return the solenoid test to normal AW4 control.
4. If you leave the solenoid ON indefinitely, the AW4 controller turns it off after three minutes to prevent possible damage to the actuator. 5. The data list parameters are displayed while the solenoid actuator is being controlled. A two or three character message is displayed at end of line 2 of the display. These characters serve as a reminder as to
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 145
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
which solenoid is being controlled. The last three characters of line 4 of the display reads ON if the normal state is being overridden by the tester. 6. When you are finished performing the solenoid test, press . When this is performed, control of the X selected solenoid is returned to the AW4 controller.
SELECT SOLENOID FROM TEST MENU
BLOCK DRIVE WHEELS. PLACE SHIFT LEVER IN PARK OR NEUTRAL.
3 Seconds
KEEP BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED DURING ACTUATOR TEST [ENTER]
e
TPS(V) 0.8V SSA BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.8 V
u
NOTE: Depress brake pedal before commanding Solenoid Test "ON"
TPS(V) 0.8V SSA BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.8 V ON
d
Command Solenoid Test "OFF"
TPS(V) 0.8V SSA BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.8 V
x
FIGURE 5-31. Example of Performing a Solenoid Actuator Test
ACTIVE KEYS )
Selects Solenoid A actuator test.
!
Selects Solenoid B actuator test.
@
Selects Solenoid C actuator test.
u
Commands solenoid to actuate.
d
Returns solenoid to normal AW4 control.
, n y
Scroll through displayed data parameters.
) , !
Mark top or bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs.
x
Exit from solenoid actuator test.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 146
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F1: RPM DISPLAY The following test is only available for 1988 and later vehicles with the EATX ECU selected under F1: TRANSMISSION systems. In this mode the tester displays engine and transmission parameters on a single display screen. To select RPM Display, do the following:
1. From the OBD Controls Menu press ! . 2. The tester displays the following data parameters: Engine Speed Turbine Shaft Speed Output Shaft Speed TPS Current Gear
X 3. Press to return to the OBD Controls Menu.
SELECT CONTROL F0: A/T OUTPUTS F1: RPM DISPLAY F2: CVI MONITOR
!
x
ENG SPD: 1425 GEAR TUR SPD: 1275 1 OUT SPD: 825 TPS: 1.75
ACTIVE KEYS ! x
Select RPM display. Return to OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 147
Mode F4: OBD Controls - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F2: CVI MONITOR The following test is only available for 1988 and later vehicles with the EATX ECU selected under F1: TRANSMISSION systems. In this mode the tester displays Transmission Clutch Volume Index (CVI) parameters on a single display screen along with the typical clutch volume range. To select CVI Monitor, do the following:
1. From the OBD Controls Menu press @ . 2. The tester displays the following clutch volume data parameters: Low-Reverse 2-4 Overdrive Underdrive
X 3. Press to return to the OBD Controls Menu. SELECT CONTROL F0: A/T OUTPUTS F1: RPM DISPLAY F2: CVI MONITOR
@
LR: 24: OD: UD:
46 56 110 65
x
(35-83) (20-77) (75-150) (24-70)
ACTIVE KEYS @ X
Select CVI Monitor. Return to OBD Controls menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 148
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F5: SYSTEM TESTS - ENGINE System Tests are diagnostic routines which incorporate tester-to- vehicle bi-directional command messages for system or device control or programming. The tester performs these tests interactively, with communication from itself to the vehicle powertrain system. All System Tests return status information after a feature or function has been performed. When these tests are completed, a result is displayed indicating the status of the system, procedure, or device under test. This mode is not applicable to all vehicles.
SUBMODE F0: SET SYNC The following test is only available on 1993 and newer 3.9L, 4.0L, 5.2L, and 5.9L fuel injected vehicles that have distributor ignition (DI) systems. The NGC Engine ECU does not currently support this function. While performing Set Sync, the tester should notify you whether or not the distributor is in the correct position. If adjustment is needed, the user should loosen but not remove the distr ibutor hold-down bolt while in this test mode and rotate the distributor accordingly. When finished, tighten hold-down bolt.
NOTE
Set Sync is for fuel synchronization only. It is not referring to ignition timing. Do not attempt to adjust ignition timing using this test because it has no effect. All ignition timing values are controlled by the PCM.
To select Set Sync, do the following:
1. From the Select Mode menu, select % to enter SYSTEM TESTS mode. 2. Press ) to select SET SYNC from the System Tests menu. 3. The tester prompts you to perform necessary safety preparation steps. 4. An information screen is displayed with the timing information for SET SYNC mode. 5. If during the test, the engine stops running or if the transmission is placed in gear, a message indicating the test has been aborted is displayed.
X 6. When you are finished performing the SET SYNC mode, press to return to System Tests menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 149
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE: F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
%
SYSTEM TEST F0: SET SYNC
)
SET PARK BRAKE BLOCK WHEELS AND START ENGINE THEN PRESS [YES]
y
TURN ACC O FF, PLACE TRANS IN PARK OR NEUT. THEN PRESS [YES]
x y SET SYNC MODE NOT AVAILABLE [EXIT]
SET SYNC SPEC=0° DISTRIB. SET=xx OUT OF SPEC. ADJUST DISTRIB.
TEST ABORTED DUE TO ENGINE NOT RUNNING [EXIT]
TEST ABORTED DUE TO TRANSMISSION IN GEAR [EXIT]
x
x
SET SYNC SPEC=0° DISTRIB. SET=xx WITHIN SPEC. NO ADJUST REQ.
x
x
FIGURE 5-32. Set Sync
ACTIVE KEYS ) x
Select Set Sync. Return to System Tests menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 150
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F1: TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) TEST The following test is only available on 1996 and later Chrysler vehicles that are RWD with 4-speed electronic transmissions. This System Test allows you to determine whether the TCC electronic and hydraulic circuits are working properly. If the user follows the tester instructions to hold the brakes for t he entire test and place the transmission in gear, selecting TCC=ON should cause the engine to stall if all is working properly. You are able to view data list parameters while performing the test. The tester displays a result screen of pass or fail after the test has been attempted. This test is applicable to trucks with a 4-speed electronically controlled automatic transmission. To select TCC test, do the following:
1. Start engine and run at idle speed. 2. From the Select Mode menu, select SYSTEM TEST by pressing % . 3. From the System Test menu, select TCC Test by pressing ! . 4. Follow the instructions that are displayed on the tester screen. You are instructed to set the park brake, hold the brakes, and place the transmission in drive. 5. Once the data list is displayed, you are ready to begin the TCC Test. 6. Press the U to engage the Torque Converter Clutch and stall the vehicle. If the vehicle does not stall within 3 seconds, a test failure screen is displayed.
X 7. When you are finished looking at the test results, press to return to the System Test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 151
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
% SYSTEM TESTS F0: SET SYNC F1: TCC TEST F2: LDP MON. TEST
! SET PARK BRAKE AND HOLD BRAKES FOR ENTIRE TEST. [ENTER]
E PLACE TRANS IN DRIVE UNTIL TEST IS COMPLETE [ENTER]
E PRESS U TO APPLY TCC. ENGINE SHOULD STALL [ENTER]
E TCC SOLENOID DISENGAGED PRESENT GEAR 1
U TCC SOLENOID ENGAGED PRESENT GEAR 1
TEST FAILED
TEST FAILED. CHECK HYDRAULIC OR ELECTRIC CKTS [EXIT]
ON
TEST PASSED
PASSED. ELECTRIC & HYDRAULIC CKTS WORKING PROPERLY [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-33. Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Test
ACTIVE KEYS !
Select TCC Test.
u
Engage TCC Test.
x
Return to System Test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 152
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F2: LDP MONITOR TEST The following test is supported for most 1998 and newer SBEC and JTEC engine systems. This system allows you to run the Leak Detection Pump (LDP) Monitor in order to verify any type of LDP system repair. This test forces the PCM to run the LDP Monitor by bypassing the normal enable conditions (such as low coolant temperature, low ambient temperature, and low fuel level). The PCM controls the engine RPM, and the test should take 3 to 5 minutes to complete. Any leaks detected during this test is stored in DTCs and Freeze Frame Data. The tester notifies you when the test is complete. Upon completion, you should check DTCs Test Mode to determine whether any failures were detected during the test. To select LDP Monitor test, do the following:
1. From the Select Mode menu, select SYSTEM TESTS by pressing % . 2. From the System Test menu, select LDP MONITOR TEST by pressing @ . 3. Read the test information displayed on the tester screens. Scroll through the screens using the up and down arrows. 4. Once you have read the information, press e to begin the test. If the PCM does not complete the test for any reason or if the test is not supported by the vehicle, the appropriate screens are displayed.
x 5. When the test is complete, press to return to the System Tests menu. You can then check for any DTCs recorded by the PCM.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 153
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
% SYSTEM TESTS F0: SET SYNC F1: TCC TEST F2: LDP MON. TEST
@ This test will run the LDP Monitor to verify EVAP Emissions System repairs. Any LDP leaks detected during this test will be stored in DTCs and Freeze Data. The LDP Monitor will be forced to run regardless of low temperature or fuel level. The PCM will change Engine RPM during this test. This test takes 3-5 minutes. [ENTER]
e Test in Progress Please Wait...
Test Complete. [ENTER]
e THIS TRIP Do ne /S to pp ed Ye s Test Failed No [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-34. LDP Monitor Test
ACTIVE KEYS @
Select LDP Monitor Test.
e
Acknowledge instructions.
x
Return to System Test menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 154
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F2: NVLD MONITOR The following test is designed for 2002 and newer NGC engine systems and can take over 10 minutes to complete. The Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (NVLD) Monitor Test is used to identify the type NVLD system repair. This test forces the PCM to run the NVLD Monitor by bypassing the normal enable conditions (such as low coolant temperature, low ambient temperature, and low fuel level). The PCM controls the engine RPM. Any leaks detected during this test are identified and displayed in test results and also by storing DTCs and Freeze Frame Data. Displayed results are for the current key cycle only. If it is necessary to re-run the test the user should turn the key off for 30 seconds. After 30 seconds, the engine can be started and the test re-selected.
NOTE If the test results di splay question marks "???" the ECU has not identifi ed a pass/fail result. This can occur when other tests have failed.
The tester notifies you when the test is complete. Upon completion, you should check DTCs Test Mode to determine whether any failures were detected during the test. To select LDP Monitor test, do the following:
1. From the Select Mode menu, select SYSTEM TESTS by pressing % . 2. From the System Tests menu, select NVLD MONITOR by pressing @ . 3. Read the test information displayed on the tester screens. 4. Once you have read the information, press e to begin the test. If the PCM does not complete the test for any reason or if the test is not supported by the vehicle, the appropriate screens are displayed.
x 5. When the test is complete, press to return to the System Tests menu. You can then check for any DTCs recorded by the PCM.
FIGURE 5-1. NVLD Monitor Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 155
Mode F5: System Tests - Engine
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SYSTEM TESTS F2: NVLD Monitor
@
The NVLD Forced Monitor test can take over 10 minutes. [ENTER]
e Set Park Brake, Block Wheels and start engine. [ENTER]
e
Test in Progress Please Wait...
Test Complete. Results are for this trip. [ENTER]
e
EVAP Large Leak Complete Yes Test Passed Yes [ENTER]
e EVAP Medium Leak Complete Yes Test Passed Yes [ENTER]
e Purge Monitor Complete Yes Test Passed Yes [ENTER]
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 156
Mode F5: System Tests - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F5: SYSTEM TESTS - TRANSMISSION SUBMODE F0: QUICK LEARN The following test is only available for 1988 and later vehicles with the EATX ECU (transaxle controller EATX s/w version 9 and later only) selected under F1: TRANSMISSION systems. In this mode the tester guides you through a test for EATX transmission learning procedure (recommended by Chrysler after performing transmission overhauling). Performing this test shortens the time r equired for the EATX ECU to learn drive cycle variations. This test guides you through the Quick Learn test procedure. Make sure the transmission is at normal operating temperature and follow all instructions that appear on the tester. The Quick Learn test automatically exits if you do not perform all necessary steps shown on the display.
NOTE
When performing the Quick Learn test, an EATX DTC 12 (battery disconnected) may result, even though the vehicle battery was not disconnected. This is normal operation of the EATX system and the Quick Learn test.
To select Quick Learn test, do the following:
1. From the Select Mode menu, select SYSTEM TESTS by pressing % . 2. From the System Tests menu, select Quick Learn by pressing ) . 3. The tester prompts you to warm the transmission to normal operating temperature, depress and hold the brake pedal, ensure engine idle speed is above 500 RPM, and select NEUTRAL GEAR (each message displayed for 5 seconds). 4. After several seconds, the tester prompts you to MOVE SHIFT LEVER TO OVERDRIVE. 5. QUICK LEARN TEST IN PROGRESS is displayed. 6. After the QUICK LEARN test is complete, the tester displays QUICK LEARN TEST COMPLETEDOK, SHIFT TO PARK and EXIT TO ESCAPE. The tester then returns you to the System Tests menu. 7. If at any time the Quick Learn test fails, a screen is displayed informing you why the failure occurred. If this happens, take appropriate action and retry the Quick Learn test. 8. When finished with the test, read EATX DTCs using F0: READ DTCs from the DTC menu and look for a DTC 12. Use F2: CLEAR DTCs to clear the EATX DTC 12.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 157
Mode F5: System Tests - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
%
SYSTEM TESTS F0: QUICK LEARN F1: PINION FACTOR
)
QUICK LEARN PROCEDURE
5 Sec.
WARM TRANS TO OPERATING TEMP, PRESS AND HOLD BRAKE PEDAL
5 Sec.
IDLE ENGINE (KEEP ABOVE 500 RPM), SELECT NEUTRAL GEAR
MOVE SHIFT LEVER TO OVERDRIVE
QUICK LEARN TEST * * IN PROGRESS * *
QUICK LEARN TEST COMPLETED... OK SHIFT TO PARK, EXIT TO ESCAPE
x or 3 Sec.
FIGURE 5-35. Quick Learn Test
ACTIVE KEYS ) X
Select Quick Learn. Return to System Tests menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 158
Mode F5: System Tests - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F1: PINION FACTOR This system test allows you to read and/or reprogram the Transmission Control Module (TCM) Pinion Factor on 1993 and newer vehicles that have a 41TE (A604) with software version 9 and newer or 1998 and newer 42LE (A606) transaxle. The Pinion Factor is used by the TCM to calculate vehicle speed and mileage. The Pinion Factor must be reprogrammed when the TCM is changed or any changes in the Final Drive Ratio and/or tire size are made. If the transmission contr ol module does not have a stored pinion factor, the vehicle’s speedometer does not operate, engine speed is limited to 2300 RPM, and catalyst damage may occur.
Submode F0: Read Allows you to read the Pinion Factor that is stored in the TCM. The Pinion Factor is displayed as a tire size. If the tester displays PINION FACTOR IS VALID, this only means that the corresponding tir e size has not been provided to Vetronix. To select Read, do the following:
1. Select SYSTEM TESTS from the Select Mode menu by pressing % . 2. Select Pinion Factor from the System Test menu by pressing ! . 3. Select READ from the Pinion Factor menu by pressing ) .
Submode F1: Reprogram Allows you to reprogram the Pinion Factor that is stored in the TCM. A list of tire sizes applicable to the vehicle under test is displayed. After selecting a tire size, the tester attempts to reprogram the Pinion Factor according to your selection. To select Reprogram, do the following:
1. Select SYSTEM TESTS from the Select Mode menu by pressing % . 2. Select Pinion Factor from the System Test menu by pressing ! . 3. Select Reprogram from the Pinion Factor menu by pressing ! . 4. Select the desired tire size by using the u and d arrow keys and then pressing E . 5. The tester tells you whether the reprogramming was successful.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 159
Mode F5: System Tests - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: I NFORMATION
% SYSTEM TESTS F0: QUICK LEARN F1: PINION FACTOR
! PINION FACTOR F0: READ F1: REPROGRAM
)
!
SELECT TIRE P195/70R14 P205/75R14 P195/65R15
CURRENT TIRE P195/65R15 [EXIT]
ADDITIONAL TIRE SIZES
SELECT TIRE P205/65R15 > P215/65R15 P215/70R15
E
REPROGRAMMING UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY? [YES/NO]
TIRE SIZE REPROGRAMMED [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-36. Pinion Factor
ACTIVE KEYS !
Select Pinion Factor from System Test menu. Select to Reprogram Pinion Factor.
)
Select to Read Pinion Factor.
e
Selects desired tire size.
u / d
Scrolls through the different tire sizes available for selection.
x
Return to the Pinion Factor menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 160
Mode F5: System Tests - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F2: TCC BREAK-IN The following procedure is only applicable to selected 2000 and later Front Wheel Drive Electronically Controlled Automatic Transmissions.
F0: View Status This submode allows you to view information about the Torque Converter Clutch Break-In status. The Torque Converter Break-In procedure is in progress until the Torque Converter has 3750 miles or 6 hours of partial EMCC.
F1: Change Status This submode allows you to change the status of the TCC Break-In procedure to either Start or Stop. F0: Start
This option is only to be used if a new Torque Converter has been installed or if a TCM is replaced on a vehicle whose Torque Converter has less than 3750 miles and less than 6 hours of partial EMCC. This procedure should be performed in order to avoid possible shudder. If the Break-In process is started unnecessarily, a shortened Torque Converter Clutch life may result. F1: Stop
This option allows you to stop the TCC Break-In procedure in progress. The parameter TCC Break-In Status changes from In Progress to Complete causing the TCM t o believe that Break-In has completed. You need to be warned that disabling a TCC Break-In that is in progress may cause customer complaints. To select TCC Break-In, do the following:
1. Select SYSTEM TESTS from the Select Mode menu by pressing % . 2. Select TCC BREAK-IN from the System Tests menu by pressing @ . 3. Press ) VIEW STATUS if you would like to view the status of the TCC Break-In procedure. If the vehicle you are testing does not have a valid Pinion Factor stored in memory, you are directed to enter one. The Pinion Factor is required to calculate the status of the Break-In procedure. 4. Press ! CHANGE STATUS to change the status of TCC Break-In. When changing the status of TCC Break-In you may select Start or Stop. Changing the status of TCC Break-I n affects vehicle performance and Torque Converter Clutch life.
x 5. Press to return to the TCC Break-In menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 161
Mode F5: System Tests - Transmission
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
% SYSTEM TESTS F0: QUICK LEARN F1: PINION FACTOR F2: TCC BREAK-IN
@ BREAK-IN MILEAGE XXXX BREAK-IN STATUS IN PROGRESS
TCC BREAK-IN F0: VIEW STATUS F1: CHANGE STATUS
)
! TCC P-EMCC YES TIME IN P-EMCC XX HRS. X X MIN.
TCC BREAK-IN F0: START F1: STOP
)
!
This option is only to be used if a new Torque Converter has
WARNING! Disabling a TCC Break-In cycle in progress may
been installed. If the Break-In process is un-necessarily
cause customer complaints. Continue? [Yes/No]
Y started, the result may be a Shortened Torque Converter Clutch
BREAK-IN PROCESS DISABLED [EXIT]
life. Are you sure you want to continue? [Yes/No]
Y BREAK-IN PROCESS ENABLED [EXIT]
FIGURE 5-37. TCC Break-In
ACTIVE KEYS u
Sends you to previous information text screen.
d
Sends you to next information text screen.
/ n x
Returns you to TCC Break-In menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 162
Mode F8: Information
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
MODE F8: INFORMATION While performing diagnostic routines on the vehicle under test it may be necessary to be provided with quick access information. Selecting information mode shall display helpful information about the vehicle or system under test. This information may consist of data link connector (DLC) location information, PCM software identification, or system identification information.
SUBMODE F3: ECU INFO (ENGINE) The following information is only applicable to 1989 and later models (except 1989 2.2L Turbo II) selected under F0: ENGINE systems. In the ECU Information mode, information about the vehicle and control module of the vehicle being tested is displayed by the tester (see Step 3). To select ECU Info (Engine), do the following:
1. Select the Information menu by pressing * from the Select Mode menu. 2. Select the ECU Info submode from the Information menu by pressing # . 3. For 3 seconds, or until U key is pressed, the tester displays: MODULE & VEHICLE INFORMATION MODE = ADVANCE = HOLD
The tester scrolls back and forth every 3 seconds between the vehicle information screens (see Figure 538): Display 1 provides the following information: Model Year Engine Displacement # of Cylinders Fuel System type Transmission type Aspiration type Display 2 provides the following information: Controller type Module (EEC) ID # and Revision Letter Emissions Fuel type Display 3 provides the following information: Body style Chassis type Engine manufacturer
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 163
Mode F8: Information
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
*
INFORMATION F3: ECU INFO F4: VEHICLE INFO
#
MODULE & VEHICLE INFORMATION MODE = ADVANCE = HOLD 3 SECONDS OR PRESS U KEY
x
x
1996 3.5L V6 INJ: MPI SEQ TRANS: 4SPD AUTO ASP: NATURAL ASP
CTRLR: SBEC III PCM: 1234567-C EM: FED/CANADIAN FUEL: UNLEADED
BODY: LH CHASSIS: FWD/LD ENG: CHRYSLER
SAMPLE DISPLAY 1
SAMPLE DISPLAY 2
SAMPLE DISPLAY 3
FIGURE 5-38. Example of 1996 System
Vehicle information is not identical for all model years. The information may vary and is displayed according to the specific model year.
ACTIVE KEYS u
Advances to next display and resumes 3 second cycling.
d
Freezes current display.
x
Return to Information menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 164
Mode F8: Information
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F3: ECU INFO (TRANSMISSION) The following ECU Information is applicable to all CCD and PCI Bus transmission systems selected under F1: TRANSMISSION SYSTEM. Within ECU INFO mode, information about the transmission controller, software version number, engine displacement, fuel system type, and controller part number of the vehicle under test is displayed by the tester. The information obtained from this submode can aid you in determining how the vehicle system is configured. In many cases this can speed up diagnostics and repair part ordering processes. To select ECU Info (Transmission), do the following:
1. Select Information from the Select Mode menu by pressing * . 2. Select the ECU INFO submode from the Information menu by pressing # . 3. The next display screen provides the following information about the vehicle you are working on: •
Transmission Controller type
•
Transmission Controller software version #
•
Engine displacement
•
Fuel system type
•
Transmission controller part #
4. Press to return to the Information Menu. X
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
*
INFORMATION F3: ECU INFO F4: VEHICLE INFO
#
4ITE TRANS S/W VER: 22 TCM: XXXXXXXXXX 2.4L MPI
FIGURE 5-39. ECU Info
ACTIVE KEYS # x
Select ECU Information. Return to Information menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 165
Mode F8: Information
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
SUBMODE F4: VEHICLE INFO Submode F0: VIN The following VIN Identification mode is only available for model years 1996 and later engine systems and all transmissions that use PCI Bus data link. The VIN ID mode allows you to electronically read the vehicle identification number that is stored in the engine ECU for OBD II vehicles.
NOTE
If the original Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has been replaced, the new PCM needs to have the VIN programmed into memory. When the tester recognizes that the VIN has not been programmed into the new PCM, it notifies you and you are directed automatically to the VIN Programming procedure. If the VIN stored in the PCM is not valid, you are allowed to correct it.
To select VIN ID, do the following:
1. Press * to select Information from the Select Mode menu. 2. Press $ to select Vehicle Info from the Inform ation menu. 3. Press ) to select VIN from the Vehicle Info menu.
SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROLS F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
*
INFORMATION F3: ECU INFO F4: VEHICLE INFO
$
VEHICLE INFO F0: VIN
)
VIN ID XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX
FIGURE 5-40. VIN ID
ACTIVE KEYS $ x
Select VIN ID from Information menu. Return to Information menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 166
Mode F8: Information
5. Selecting and Operating Test Modes
Submode F1: Configuration (Transmission) The following information is displayed for some engine systems and all transmission systems wi th software version 9 and later. In this mode, the tester may display information such as software level, vehicle model year, or whether the ECU is equipped for EGR, EATX, SRV, MTV, or NVLD. To select Configuration, do the following:
1. Select Information from the Select Mode menu by pressing * . 2. Select Vehicle Info from the Information menu by pressing $ . 3. Select Configuration from the Vehicle Info menu by pressing ! . The tester displays the available information.
X 4. Press to return to the Information menu. SELECT MODE F4: OBD CONTROL F5: SYSTEM TESTS F8: INFORMATION
*
INFORMATION F3: ECU INFO F4: VEHICLE INFO
$
VEHICLE INFO F0: VIN F1: CONFIGURATION
!
EATX SOFTWARE YR 1994 VEHICLE MODEL YR 1994
x or 3 Sec.
FIGURE 5-41. Example of EATX Configuration
ACTIVE KEYS ! x
Select Configuration Information. Return to Information menu.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 167
6. FINISHING UP
After using the application, do the following:
1. If the repairs are complete, clear the codes from memory before test driving to see if they recur or before releasing the vehicle to the customer. The most likely code which may have been set is fault code 42, Automatic Shutdown Relay, during CDR test m ode for 1983-1988 vehicles. •
If you have cleared the codes for a component but the codes are still set, then the conditions which caused the codes to be set may still be present. Refer to the OEM service manual to isolate the problem.
2. If the repairs are not yet complete, or if you want to continue testing at a later time, do not clear the codes from memory. Print a copy of the codes or write the codes down for comparison to the codes displayed when testing is resumed. 3. Disconnect the tester from the cigarette lighter plug or the battery terminal adapter. 4. Disconnect the cables and adapters from the vehicle’s DLC. You may want to inspect the cable, connector, and cigarette lighter for any damage or corrosion. 5. Store all hardware components in the tester storage case.
NOTE
If the tester becomes dirty, clean it by wiping it with a rag dampened with mild detergent or hand soap. Avoid using harsh, petroleum-based cleaning solvents such as acetone, benzene, and trichloroethylene, as they may damage the tester. Although the tester is water resistant, it is not waterproof, so be sure to thoroughly dry off the tester pr ior to storage. Do not submerge the t ester in water.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 168
A. IF YOU’RE HAVING A PROBLEM
Although the Tech 1, Tech 1A, and MTS 3100 are designed to give you years of trouble-free service, occasional problems may occur that require special attention. Some of t hese problems may be corrected with a few simple steps. Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown. In addition, the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem. If the problem appears to be in the tester, perform the Self-test as described in the Operator ’s Manual.
BLANK SCREEN
Most Likely Cause
•
Faulty cable.
Other Possible Causes
•
No power is applied to the tester.
•
Power supply is malfunctioning.
Recommendations
•
Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation.
•
If tester is powered by DC power cable, check for 12 volt power at the cigarette lighter.
•
Check for proper polarity of 12 volt power (center conductor of cigarette lighter socket should be positive).
•
If tester is powered by the DLC, check for 12V power at the vehicle DLC. If either is faulty, connect and ground the DC power cable to the tester or DLC cable then plug the cable into the cigarette lighter.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 169
Screen Displays Solid Bars
A. If You’re Having a Problem
SCREEN DISPLAYS SOLID BARS
Most Likely Cause
•
Two master cartridges are installed.
Other Possible Causes
•
Master cartridge is malfunctioning.
•
Tester is malfunctioning.
Recommendations
•
Make sure that only one master cartridge is installed in the tester.
•
Remove all cartridges and see if MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed. If it is, try installing another master cartridge.
TESTER DOES NOT RECOGNIZE APPLICATION CARTRIDGE OR CARTRIDGE IS MALFUNCTIONING MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING
Most Likely Cause
•
Master cartridge is not installed.
Other Possible Causes
•
Dirty contacts on the master cartridge connector.
•
Try a different master cartridge.
Recommendations
•
Verify that a master cartridge is installed.
•
Clean contacts on master cartridge connector with alcohol.
•
Try a different master cartridge.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 170
Wrong Display after Power Is Applied
A. If You’re Having a Problem
WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED ALL 87-89 ECM 'PLUS' SELECT MODEL YEAR: 198?
FORD 81-89 ECA F0: STAR MODE F1: TECH 1 MODE
Most Likely Cause
•
Wrong master cartridge is installed.
Other Possible Causes
•
Master cartridge is malfunctioning.
•
Tester is malfunctioning.
Recommendations
•
Verify that the cartridge is installed in the bottom slot of the tester and that there isn’t a master cartridge (e.g., E/K 86-87 SYSTEM) in the top slot.
•
Try another cartridge.
•
Perform the Self-test as described in the Operator’s Manual.
KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM INTERMITTENTLY RETURNS TO TITLE SCREEN CHRYSLER POWERTRAIN 1983 - 2004 vX.X [ENTER]
Most Likely Cause
•
DLC cable loose or bad.
Other Possible Causes
•
Master Cartridge loose or dirty contacts.
•
Cigarette lighter power intermittent.
•
Tester malfunction.
Recommendations
•
Cycle power to the tester (unplug and replug the cigarette lighter adapter).
•
Check tester cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector.
•
Check DLC cable and connector for wear or corrosion.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 171
Tester Is Not Receiving Data
A. If You’re Having a Problem
TESTER IS NOT RECEIVING DATA NO DATA. VERIFY IGNITION ON, CHECK CABLES OR RESELECT (EXIT)
Most Likely Cause
•
Ignition switch is OFF.
Other Possible Causes
•
DLC cable loose or bad connector-pins loose or corroded.
•
Improperly selected EEC.
•
Chrysler adapter-DLC connector cable problems.
•
Bad EEC.
•
Engine not running on some pre-1989 vehicles.
Recommendations
•
Verify a good DLC cable/Chrysler adapter connection.
•
Cycle power to the tester.
•
Run the Self-test.
•
Re-select vehicle with engine running for pre-1989 model year.
DATA LIST PARAMETERS FLASH ON AND OFF ENGINE SPEED 950 RPM ENG. IDLE SPEED 950 RPM
ENGINE SPEED ENG. IDLE SPEED
Most Likely Cause
•
DLC cable/Chrysler adapter loose or bad.
Other Possible Causes
•
DLC cable connector-pins loose or corroded.
•
Chrysler adapter pins loose or corroded.
•
EEC-DLC connector cable problems.
•
Intermittent EEC problem.
Recommendations
•
Verify a good DLC cable connection.
•
Cycle power to the tester.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 172
B. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) DESCRIPTIONS
CURRENT AND HISTORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES Depending on the vehicle selected, a Diagnostic Trouble Code may have several different (although usually somewhat similar) meanings. Listed below are all of the DTC descriptors that can be displayed with the Chrysler Powertrain Application. Once a DTC is set, it remains in memory as a history code for 40-50 ignition cycles after the last occurrence. If a DTC is present all of the time, it is also a current code. On 1989 and newer models (except 1989 2.2 L Turbo II), you can determine i f there are any current codes by viewing Key On information in Data List mode, or by studying the N (number) SINCE LAST FC, which is part of the DTC Summary display. The Key On Cycles tells you the number of ignition cycles since the last DTC was set. If a DTC is current, the Key On Cycles number equals 0. If more than one DTC has been set for the 1990 and later models, the number of Key On cycles since the 2nd latest and 3rd latest DTCs were set can also be displayed by entering F0:DATA LIST MODE.
EEC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs for 1983 and newer models are listed on the following pages. Due to changes in Chrysler’s diagnostic trouble code numbering system, the code number often represents different faults depending on the year and model being tested. Therefore, more than one descriptor for a DTC may be listed. During actual testing, the tester only displays DTCs applicable to the year and model chosen in the selection process. DTCs for 1998 and later SBEC/JTEC vehicles are listed separately beginning on page 191.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 173
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
ENGINE DTCS EEC DTC 11
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR OXYGEN SOLENOID ERROR
O2 circuit not responding to computer commands.
NO CRANK SINCE BATTERY DISCONN.
Engine has not been cranked since the memory was cleared or since battery disconnected.
CMP/CKP SIG. OR CIRCUIT
12
13
Expected cam signal disagrees with actual cam signal.
VIC CKP SIGNAL
No crank position sensor signal present at the ignition control module.
CMP/CKP TIMING
Relationship between cam and crank signals not correct, timing belt may be misaligned.
NO CRANKSHAFT SENSOR LEARN
PCM is unable to learn the crank sensor’s signal in preparation for misfire diagnostics.
IGNITION REF/CRANK CKT
No reference signal (crankshaft position sensor) detected during engine cranking.
LOSS OF CAM OR CRANK SIGNAL
Loss of CMP or CKP sensor has occurred.
BATTERY FEED TO COMPUTER LOST
Battery feed to the Logic Module recently disconnected. Code disappears 30-40 engine starts after reconnection.
TRANSM. UNLOCK RELAY CIRCUIT
Transmission unlock relay not responding to computer commands.
MAP SENSOR VACUUM PROBLEM
Less than 4 in. vacuum difference at idle between manifold and BARO read vacuum. MAP sensor vacuum level not changing between start and run.
MAP PNEUMATIC SIGNAL VOS CONTROL SOLENOID
14
DESCRIPTION
MAP sensor signal not changing when engine running.
VOS control solenoid circuit does not turn off and on at the p roper time.
CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID DRIVER
Solenoid not turning on and off properly.
AIR SWITCH SOLENOID DRIVER
Air switching solenoid circuit has open or shorted circuit.
MAP SIGNAL NO PRESS CHANGE
No difference is recognized between the MAP reading at engine idle and the stored barometric pressure reading.
COMPUTER POWER LOST
Battery was disconnected within last 20-40 start-ups.
MAP SENSOR ELECTRIC. PROBLEM
MAP sensor signal above or below acceptable voltage.
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
MAP sensor input below minimum acceptable voltage.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 174
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC 14 cont.
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH MAP SENSOR NO 5V REFERENCE
15
16
17
Loss of 5 volt feed to the MAP Sensor has been detected.
No signal from vehicle speed sensor (VSS) detected within past 13 VSS seconds. Indicated speed less than 2 mph while vehicle moving. Distance sensor signal during road load conditions not detected.
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
The relationship between the OSS and vehicle speed is not within acceptable limits.
LOSS OF BATTERY VOLTAGE SENSE
Battery sensing voltage dropped below acceptable level. Battery voltage sense input not detected during engine running.
FAN RELAY CIRCUIT PROBLEM
Relay not turning on and off pro perly.
KNOCK SENSOR #1 CIRCUIT
Knock sensor #1 signal above or below minimum acceptable threshold voltage at particular engine speeds.
KNOCK SENSOR #2 CIRCUIT
Knock sensor #2 signal above or below minimum acceptable threshold voltage at particular engine speeds.
LOW ENGINE TEMPERATURE
KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
Engine coolant temperature remains below normal operating temperature during vehicle travel. Throttle circuit control solenoid not switching correctly.
Knock sensor signal less than acceptable threshold voltage.
CLO TEMP NOT REACHED
Engine temperature not warm enough for closed loop operation. Time to enter Closed Loop Operation (Fuel Control) is excessive.
VOS CONTROL SOLENOID
VOS control solenoid circuit does not turn off and on at the p roper time.
CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID DRIVER
Solenoid not turning off and on properly.
PURGE/EGR SOLENOID DRIVER
Open or shorted circuit in purge solenoid circuit.
EGR SOLENOID DRIVER CIRCUIT 21
MAP sensor input above maximum acceptable voltage.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
ELEC. THROTTLE CONTROL SOLENOID
18
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
DISTRIBUTOR PICKUP COIL OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Open or shorted condition in EGR solenoid circuit.
No distributor signal input at computer.
No O2 sensor signal for more than acceptable time while in closed loop.
Knock sensor signal less than acceptable threshold voltage.
Page 175
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC 21 cont.
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
O2 SENSOR SHORTED HIGH
Input voltage from the O2 sensor stays above normal operating range.
02 SENSOR 1/1 VOLTAGE HIGH
02 sensor voltage maintained above normal operating range.
DNSTREAM 02S 1/2 VOLTAGE HIGH 02 SENSOR 2/1 VOLTAGE HIGH
02 sensor input voltage maintained above normal operating range.
02 sensor voltage maintained above normal operating range.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 CAT MON TST FAIL
A slow switching O2 sensor has been detected during catalyst monitor test.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 CAT MON TST FAIL
A slow switching O2 sensor has been detected during catalyst monitor test.
DNSTREAM 02S 1/2 CAT MON TST FAIL
A slow switching O2 sensor has been detected during catalyst monitor test.
DNSTREAM 02S 2/2 VOLTAGE HIGH
02 sensor input voltage maintained above normal operating range.
02 SENSOR 1/1 NO R/L COND.
02 sensor signal detects neither rich nor lean condition.
02 SENSOR 1/2 NO R/L COND.
02 sensor detects neither rich nor lean condition.
02 SENSOR 2/1 NO R/L COND.
02 sensor detects neither rich nor lean condition.
02 SENSOR 2/2 NO R/L COND.
02 sensor detects neither rich nor lean condition.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 INACTIVE
Neither rich nor lean condition is detected from the oxygen sensor input.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 VOLTAGE HIGH
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained above normal operating range.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 INACTIVE
Neither rich nor lean condition is detected from the oxygen sensor input.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 VOLTAGE HIGH
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained above normal operating range.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE
Oxygen sensor response is slower than minimum required switching frequency.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT
Oxygen sensor heater element malfunction. O2 sensor signal not received when EEC powers up the sensor heater.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 SLOW RESPONSE
O2 sensor voltage rich and lean values not achieved within specified test period. O2 sensor response not as expected.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 176
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC 21 cont.
22
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 HEATER CIRCUIT
Oxygen sensor heater element malfunction. O2 sensor signal not received when EEC powers up the sensor heater.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 SLOW RESPONSE
Oxygen sensor response is slower than minimum required switching frequency.
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 SLOW RESPONSE
Oxygen sensor response is slower than minimum required switching frequency.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 HEATER CIRCUIT
Oxygen sensor heater element malfunction. O2 sensor signal not received when EEC powers up the sensor heater.
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 HEATER CIRCUIT
Oxygen sensor heater element malfunction. O2 sensor signal not received when EEC powers up the sensor heater.
DNSTREAM O2S l/2 INACTIVE
Neither rich nor lean condition is detected from the oxygen sensor input.
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 INACTIVE
Neither rich nor lean condition is detected from the oxygen sensor input.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 VOLTAGE LOW
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained below normal operating range.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 VOLTAGE HIGH
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained above normal operating range.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 VOLTAGE LOW
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained below normal operating range.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 VOLTAGE LOW
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained below normal operating range.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 SLOW RESPONSE
Oxygen sensor response slower than minimum required switching frequency.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 INACTIVE
Neither rich nor lean condition is detected from the oxygen sensor.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 VOLTAGE LOW
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained below normal operating range.
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 VOLTAGE LOW
Oxygen sensor input voltage maintained below normal operating range.
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 HEATER CIRCUIT
Oxygen sensor heater element malfunction.
RADIATOR SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
Radiator coolant temperature sensor input below minimum acceptable voltage.
RADIATOR SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
Radiator coolant temperature sensor input above maximum acceptable voltage.
COOLNT TEMP SNSR PERFORMANCE
A rationality error has been detected in the coolant temperature sensor.
OXYGEN FEEDBACK SYSTEM
System stays rich or lean longer than expected during closed loop.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 177
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
22 cont.
COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR CIRCUIT
23
Sensor temp. above or below acceptable voltage or changes too fast.
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
ECT sensor input below minimum acceptable voltage.
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
ECT sensor input above acceptable voltage.
OXYGEN FEEDBACK SYSTEM LEAN
Oxygen feedback system stayed lean too long.
T/B TEMP VOLTAGE LOW
Throttle body temp. sensor b elow acceptable voltage.
T/B TEMP VOLTAGE HIGH
Throttle body temp. sensor above acceptable voltage.
CHARGE VOLTAGE LOW
Charge temperature sensor below acceptable voltage.
CHARGE VOLTAGE HIGH
Charge temperature sensor above acceptable voltage.
T/B TEMP CIRCUIT PROBLEM
Throttle body temperature sensor above or below acceptable voltage.
CHARGE TEMP. SENSOR CIRCUIT
Charge temperature above or below acceptable voltage or changes too fast.
OXYGEN FEEDBACK SYSTEM RICH
24
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
Rich condition detected for longer than is acceptable.
IAT VOLTAGE LOW
Intake air temperature sensor voltage is b elow acceptable level.
IAT VOLTAGE HIGH
Intake air temperature sensor voltage is above acceptable level.
HEATED AIR INTAKE CIRCUIT
Energizing Heated Air Intake does not change intake air temperature sensor an acceptable amount.
VACUUM TRANSDUC. FAILURE
Vacuum transducer not functioning.
TPS CIRCUIT PROBLEM
Throttle position sensor signal above o r below acceptable voltage.
TPS VOLTAGE LOW
TPS Voltage below acceptable level.
TPS VOLTAGE HIGH
TPS Voltage above acceptable level.
TPS SIGNAL DIFFERS WITH MAP
TPS signal does not correlate to MAP sensor signal.
TP SENSOR NO 5V REFERENCE
Loss of 5 volt feed to the Throttle Position Sensor has been detected.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 178
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
25
IAC (AIS) MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT RADIATOR FAN TEMP. SENSOR CHARGE TEMP. SENSOR CIRCUIT
26
A shorted condition detected in one or more of the Idle Air Control valve circuits. NOTE: Open circuit does not cause code to be set. Engine temperature sensor and radiator fan temperature are different, or temperature changes too fast. Charge temperature too high, too low, or changes too fast.
VACUUM LEAK (DETECTED)
Vacuum leak found with IAC seated (ECU MAP and TPS signal comparison out of range).
TARGET IDLE NOT REACHED
Target RPM not achieved during drive idle condition. Possible vacuum leak or IAC (AIS) lost steps.
ENGINE TEMP. SENSOR
Coolant or charge temperature sensor less than expected after 30 min., or temperature changes too fast.
INJECTOR X PEAK CURRENT
High resistance detected in the INJX injector bank circuit. X=1, 2, 3.
PEAK INJECTOR CURRENT LOW
The current through fuel injectors not reaching proper peak level.
CHARGE TEMP. SENSOR CIRCUIT INJ 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT 27
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
Charge temperature too high, too low, or changes too fast.
Injector 1 output driver does not respond properly to control circuit.
INJECTOR X CONTROL CIRCUIT
An open or shorted condition detected in control circuit for injector X or the INJ X injector bank. X=1, 2,…10.
INJECTOR DRIVER INTERFACE CIRC.
Fuel injector driver interface is not switching properly.
VACUUM TRANSDUC. FAILURE
Vacuum transducer not functioning.
COMPUTER FAILURE SENSED
Computer failed upon entry into the diagnostic mode.
FUEL INJ. TIMING CIRCUIT
Desired fuel injector timing advance can’t be achieved via the fuel timing solenoid.
28
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
Speed sensor circuit is not between 2 and 150 mph.
31
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CKT
An open or shorted condition detected in the EVAP purge solenoid control circuit.
PURGE/EGR SOLENOID DRIVER
Open or shorted circuit in purge solenoid circuit.
NO CRANK SINCE BATTERY DISCONN.
Engine has not been cranked since the memory was cleared or since battery disconnected.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 179
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC 31 cont.
32
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR EVAP PURGE FLOW MONITOR FAIL
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) No air flow through the evaporative system is detected by the evap monitor.
EVAP SYSTEM SMALL LEAK
A small leak has b een detected in the evaporative system.
EVAP SYSTEM GROSS LEAK
A large leak has b een detected in the evaporative system.
EVAP LDP SYSTEM HOSE PINCHED
LDP has detected a pinched hose in the evaporative hose system.
EVAP SYSTEM FLOW MALFUNCTION
Insufficient or excessive vapor flow detected during evaporative emission system operation.
LEAK DET PUMP SOLENOID CKT
An open or shorted condition detected in the Leak Detection Pump solenoid circuit.
LEAK DET PUMP PRESS SNSR SW
Incorrect input state detected for the Leak Detection Pump pressure switch.
EGR POSIT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
EGR position sensor input is below the acceptable voltage range.
EGR POSIT SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
EGR position sensor input is above the acceptable voltage range.
LOSS OF 5V FEED TO EGR SENSOR
Loss of 5V feed to the EGR position sensor.
EGR POSIT SENSOR PERFORMANCE
EGR position sensor signal does not correlate to EGR duty cycle.
COMPUTER FAILURE SENSED
Computer failed upon entry into the diagnostic mode.
POWER LOSS LAMP CIRCUIT PROBLEM
Proper voltage at power loss lamp not present.
EGR SOLENOID DRIVER CIRCUIT EGR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE FAIL SURGE VALVE SOLENOID CKT
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Open or shorted condition detected in EGR solenoid circuit.
System failed 8 self-checks. OR Required change in F/A ratio not detected during diagnostic test. An open or shorted condition is detected in the turbocharger surge valve solenoid control circuit.
Page 180
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
33
A/C CUT-OUT RELAY PROBLEM A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT
33 cont.
34
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Relay not turning on and off pro perly.
Open or shorted circuit in A/C clutch relay circuit.
COMPUTER FAILURE SENSED
Computer failed upon entry into the diagnostic mode.
A/C PRESS SENSOR VOLT INPUT HIGH
A/C pressure sensor voltage is above the acceptable level.
A/C PRESS SENSOR VOLT INPUT LOW
A/C pressure sensor voltage is below the acceptable level.
A/C PRESS SENSOR NO 5V REFERENCE
Loss of a 5 volt feed to the A/C pressure sensor has been detected.
NO 5V TO MAP SENSOR
Loss of a 5 volt feed to the MAP sensor has been detected.
NO 5V TO TPS SENSOR
Loss of a 5 vo lt feed to the Throttle Position Sensor has been detected.
S/C SERVO SOLENOID CKT
An open or shorted condition is detected in either of the speed control vacuum or vent solenoid control circuits.
STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT PROBLEM
Four consecutive startups with no starter relay actuation detected by computer.
EGR SOLENOID DRIVER CIRCUIT
Open or shorted condition detected in EGR solenoid circuit.
MUX S/C SWITCH VOLT INPUT HIGH
Speed control switch input above maximum acceptable voltage.
MUX S/C SWITCH VOLT INPUT LOW
Speed control switch input below minimum acceptable voltage.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 181
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
35
HIGH SPEED FAN 3 CIRCUIT IDLE CONTACT SWITCH CIRCUIT IDLE SWITCH OPEN
Idle contact switch input circuit shorted to ground.
Open circuit in Idle contact switch.
An open or short is detected in the control circuit of the low speed fan control relay.
LOW SPD FAN RLY CKT OPEN/SHORT
An open or short is detected in the control circuit of the high speed fan control relay.
HIGH SPEED FAN RELAY OPEN/SHORT
An open or short is detected in the control circuit of the high speed fan control relay.
HIGH SPD FAN 2 CKT OPEN/SHORT
An open or short is detected in the control circuit of the #2 high speed fan control r elay.
IDLE SWITCH SHORT
36 cont.
Open or shorted condition detected in circuit of #3 high speed fan.
LOW SPEED FAN RELAY OPEN/SHORT
RADIATOR FAN RELAY CIRCUIT
36
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
An open or short is detected in the radiator fan control relay circuit. This includes PWM solid state relays. Idle contact switch input circuit shorted to ground.
HIGH SPEED FAN 3 CIRCUIT
An open or shorted condition detected in the control circuit of the #3 high speed fan relay.
AIR ASST SOL CKT OPEN/SHORT CKT
Open or shorted condition detected in the air assist solenoid circuit.
WASTEGATE SOLENOID CKT
Short or open circuit in the wastegate solenoid circuit.
VNT-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Open or short in VNT-3 solenoid circuit.
SECONDARY AIR SOLENOID CKT
The secondary air solenoid circuit is not in the expected state when requested by the PCM.
BOOST LIMIT EXCEEDED
MAP reading above over-boost limit detected during engine operation.
SECONDARY AIR SWITCHING CKT
An open or shorted condition in the secondary air (air switching/ aspirator) solenoid circuit.
SECONDARY AIR LOW FLOW
Insufficient flow of secondary air injection detected during aspirator test.
SECONDARY AIR HIGH FLOW
Excessive flow of secondary air injection detected during aspirator test.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 182
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
37
EATX RPM PULSE PERFORMANCE
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) EATX RPM pulse generator signal for misfire detection does not correlate with expected value.
REV GEAR LOCKOUT CIRCUIT
Open or shorted condition detected in the transmission reverse gear lock-out solenoid circuit.
TRANSM. LOCKUP SOLENOID PROBLEM
Solenoid not turning on and off properly.
SHIFT LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Open or shorted condition detected in torque converter part throttle unlock solenoid circuit.
TCC SOLENOID CKT (3ATX ONLY)
Open or short in torque converter clutch (part throttle unlock) solenoid circuit. Shift solenoid C electrical fault. Aisin transmission, or Trans Relay Circuit in JTEC RE Transmissions.
BARO READ SOLENOID FAILURE
Open or short in the BARO read solenoid circuit.
2-3 GEAR LOCKOUT CIRCUIT
An open or short is detected in the transmission 2-3 gear lock-out solenoid control circuit.
TRANS TEMP SNSR VOLT LOW
Trans temperature sensor voltage goes below the acceptable voltage.
TRANS TEMP SNSR VOLT HIGH
Trans temperature sensor voltage goes above the acceptable voltage.
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH CIRCUIT
Incorrect input state detected for the Park/Neutral switch.
OVERDRIVE SOLENOID DRIVER
An open or shorted condition detected in the overdrive solenoid circuit or Trans Relay Circuit in JTEC RE transmissions.
GOV MID PRESSURE MALFUNCTION
Requested and actual pressure are out of tolerance band for the Governor Control System used to regulate governor pressure to control shifts. (Mid Pressure Malfunction)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 183
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
37 cont.
GOV ZERO PRESS MALFUNCTION
Requested and actual pressure are out of tolerance band for the Governor Control System used to regulate governor pressure to control shifts. (Zero Pressure Malfunction)
TCC(PTU) LOCKUP NO RPM DROP
Relationship between engine and vehicle speeds indicated failure of torque convertor clutch lock-up system (TCC/PTU sol, TC switch valve, fluid level, etc.)
3-4 SHIFT MALFUNCTION
The overdrive solenoid is unable to engage the gear change from 3rd gear to the overdrive gear.
GOV PRESSURE SOLENOID CKT
An open or shorted condition detected in the governor Pressure Solenoid circuit or Trans Relay Circuit in JTEC RE transmissions.
TRANS VOLTAGE RELAY CIRCUIT
An open or shorted condition is detected in the Transmission Relay circuit. This relay supplies power to the TCC, Overdrive, and Governor Pressure solenoids.
SHIFT SOLENOID A CIRCUIT MALF TRANS RANGE SENSOR
41
Shift solenoid A (1-2/3-4) functional fault- Aisin transmission.
Range sensor—Aisin transmission.
1-2/3-4 SHIFT SOL CIRCUIT MALF
Shift solenoid A electrical fault—Aisin transmission.
2-3 SHIFT SOL CIRCUIT MALF
Shift solenoid B electrical fault—Aisin transmission.
REV GEAR LOCKOUT CIRCUIT
An open or shorted condition detected in the transmission reverse gear lock-out solenoid circuit.
CHARGING SYSTEM PROBLEM
Switched battery voltage from ASD relay below acceptable range.
ALTERNATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT
Field control interface not switching properly
ALTERNATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT
Open or short in Alternator Field Control circuit.
STARTER RELAY CKT OPEN/SHORT 42
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
ASD RELAY CIRCUIT
Z1 VOLTAGE SENSE ASD RELAY NO VOLT AT PCM
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
An open or short is detected in the starter relay control circuit.
Switched voltage from ASD during cranking is not present within 1/3 second after first injector ON signal. Engine stalls if switched battery voltage from ASD is present more than 3 seconds from last injector signal. Open or shorted auto shutdown relay circuit (primary side). An open or shorted condition detected in the ASD or CNG shutoff relay control. Z1 voltage absent when auto shutdown relay is energized. No output voltage is detected when the auto shutdown relay is energized.
Page 184
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
42 cont.
FUEL LEVEL SNSR VOLTAGE LOW
Fuel level sensor signal goes below the acceptable voltage level.
FUEL LEVEL SNSR VOLTAGE HIGH
Fuel level sensor signal goes above the acceptable voltage level.
FUEL PUMP RELAY CKT OPEN/SHORT
An open or short is detected in the fuel pump relay control circuit.
FUEL LEVEL SNSR NO VOLT CHANGE
During low fuel, no change in fuel level has been seen for a set n umber of miles. Fuel level signal does not change a calibrated amount over a calculated number of miles.
IGN COIL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT
A coil (1-5) is drawing too much current.
43
IGNITION & FUEL INTERFACE ERROR
Either ignition or fuel signal not present between logic module and power module; OR injector OFF signal is shorted.
IGNITION CONTROL CIRCUIT
Spark control interface not switching pr operly. Output driver stage for ignition coil does not respond to the dwell control signal.
IGNITION COIL X CIRCUIT MULTIPLE CYL MISFIRE NBF SENSOR NO TIMING SIGNAL
44
Peak primary circuit current not reached with maximum dwell time. X = 1-8. Misfire detected in multiple cylinders.
No fuel injector timing pulses detected during engine cranking.
CYLINDER x MISFIRE
Misfire detected in cylinder #x. x= 1-10.
IGN COIL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT
A coil (1-5) is drawing too much current.
LOGIC MODULE WRONG PROM LOSS OF FUSED J2 TO LOGIC BOARD
Wrong prom installed in logic module.
Fused J2 (FJ2) not present in SMEC.
BATTERY TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT
Signal from battery temperature sensor is above or below acceptable voltage.
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
Battery (ambient) temperature sensor input below acceptable voltage.
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
Battery (ambient) temperature sensor input above acceptable voltage.
AAT SENSOR CIRCUIT 45
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
BOOST LIMIT EXCEEDED
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Ambient/Battery temperature sensor input v oltage out of an acceptable range. MAP sensor above acceptable boost.
Page 185
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
45 cont.
OVERDRIVE SOLENOID DRIVER
MAP sensor signal exceeded predetermined amount of boost indication.
TRAN TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
Transmission fluid temperature sensor input below acceptable voltage.
TRAN TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
Transmission fluid temperature sensor input above acceptable voltage.
EATX DTC PRESENT
Indicates that there is an active DTC in the transmission controller that has illuminated the MIL.
TRANS TEMP SNSR CIRCUIT
47
51
Short or open circuit in overdrive solenoid circuit.
OVERBOOST FUEL SHUTOFF
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH CIRCUIT
46
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
Incorrect input state detected for the Park/Neutral switch.
Relationship between transmission temperature and overdrive operation and/or TCC operation indicates a failure of the Transmission Temperature Sensor.
GOV PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
The Governor Pressure Sensor input is below an acceptable voltage level.
GOV PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
The Governor Pressure Sensor input is above an acceptable voltage level.
GOV PRESSURE SENSOR OFFSET
The Governor Pressure Sensor input is greater than or less than a calibration limit for 3 consecutive park/neutral calibrations.
OVERDRIVE SWITCH LOW
Overdrive override switch input is in a prolonged depressed state.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
Battery voltage more than 1 volt below desired voltage.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
Battery voltage more than 1 volt above desired voltage.
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH
Battery voltage sense input is above target charging voltage during engine operation.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
Battery voltage more than 1 volt below desired voltage.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
Battery voltage more than 1 volt above desired voltage.
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW
Battery voltage sense input is detected as b eing below target charging voltage during engine operation. No significant change in voltage is detected during active test of alternator output.
O2 FEEDBACK CIRCUIT PROBLEM BARO OUT OF RANGE
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
O2 sensor indicates lean condition for longer than acceptable time.
MAP Sensor input voltage not within an acceptable range during reading of Barometric pressure.
Page 186
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC 51 cont.
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR EXCESSIVE ENRICHMENT
O2 sensor indicates a rich fuel/air condition.
LEAN CONDITION BANK 2
A sustained lean fuel/air ratio in bank #2 exceeds the acceptable range of the adaptive fuel control.
FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN CONDITION
A lean air/fuel mixture has been indicated by an abnormally rich correction factor.
FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN CONDITION
A lean air/fuel mixture has been indicated by an abnormally rich correction factor.
AFR LEAN CONDITION
52
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
Right front 02 sensor indicates sustained lean condition during engine operation.
O2 2/1 SUSTAINED RICH CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 2/1 input indicates sustained rich condition during engine operation.
O2 1/1 SUSTAINED RICH CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 1/1 input indicates sustained rich condition during engine operation.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 LEAN CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 2/1 input indicates sustained lean condition during engine operation.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 LEAN CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 1/1 input indicates sustained lean condition during engine operation.
LEAN CONDITION BANK 1
A sustained lean fuel/air ratio exceeds the range of authority of the adaptive fuel control (bank 1).
LEAN CONDITION DURING WOT
A prolonged lean condition is detected during Wide Open Throttle, indicating possible fuel starvation due to a plugged fuel filter, or a blocked fuel inlet sock.
LOGIC MODULE MPU/ROM FAILURE EXCESSIVE FUEL VALVE LEANING WASTEGATE 2 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Failure in logic module indicated.
Adaptive fuel value leaned excessively due to sustained rich condition.
Open or short in wastegate #2 solenoid circuit.
AFR RICH CONDITION
Right front 02 sensor indicates sustained rich condition during engine operation.
RICH CONDITION BANK 2
A sustained rich fuel/air ratio in bank #2 exceeds the acceptable range of the adaptive fuel control.
FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH CONDITION
A rich air/fuel mixture has been indicated by an abnormally lean correction factor.
FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH CONDITION
A rich air/fuel mixture has been indicated by an abnormally rich correction factor.
O2 2/1 SUSTAINED LEAN CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 2/1 input indicates sustained lean condition during engine operation.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 187
Engine DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EEC DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
52 cont.
O2 1/1 SUSTAINED LEAN CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 1/1 input indicates sustained lean condition during engine operation.
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 RICH CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 1/1 input indicates sustained rich condition during engine operation.
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 RICH CONDITION
Oxygen sensor 2/1 input indicates sustained rich condition during engine operation.
RICH CONDITION BANK 1
A sustained rich fuel/air ratio exceeds the range of authority of the adaptive fuel control.
53
LOGIC MODULE PROM TEST FAILED PCM INTERNAL SELF-TEST FAIL
54
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
Logic module self-test failure indicated.
Engine controller failed self-test.
PCM INTERNAL SPI COMM. FAILURE
An internal serial communications bus failure is detected.
LOGIC MODULE RIOT/ROM FAILURE
Failure in logic module indicated.
HIGH DATA RATE PICK-UP CIRCUIT
No distributor sync. pickup signal.
VIC CMP SIGNAL
No cam position sensor (sync) signal present at the ignition control module.
CMP SENSOR CIRCUIT
No fuel sync, cam sensor, or high data rate signal detected during engine crankshaft rotation.
55
END OF FAULT CODES
Indicates end of diagnostic fault codes in CDR mode.
61
BARO READ SOLENOID CKT
Open or shorted condition in the BARO read solenoid circuit.
BARO PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE
ECU senses the MAP sensor voltage to be out of its acceptable range during reading of barometric pressure at key-on.
62
SRI/EMR MILEAGE NOT STORED
Unable to upd ate SRI/EMR mileage in the controller.
63
EEPROM WRITE DENIED
Unable to write to an EEPROM location by the controller.
64
VNT-1 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Open or short in VNT-1 solenoid circuit.
FLEX FUEL SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
Flex fuel sensor voltage is above the maximum acceptable value.
FLEX FUEL SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
Flex fuel sensor voltage is below the minimum acceptable value.
CNG TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
Compressed natural gas temperature sensor voltage below acceptable voltage.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 188
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC 64 cont.
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR CNG TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
Compressed natural gas pressure sensor reading below acceptable voltage.
CNG PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
Compressed natural gas pressure sensor reading below acceptable voltage.
Catalyst efficiency is below required level.
CNG SYSTEM PRESSURE HIGH
Compressed natural gas system pressure is above normal operating range.
SHORT RUN VALVE OPEN/SHORT CKT
Open or shorted condition detected in the short runner tuning v alve circuit.
BRAKE SW SENSE CIRCUIT MALF. MANIFOLD TUNE VLV CKT OPEN/SHORT POWER STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
67
No calibration voltage present from flex fuel sensor.
CATALYTIC CONV EFFICIENCY FAIL
VNT-2 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
66
Compressed natural gas temperature sensor voltage above acceptable voltage.
CNG PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
FLEX FUEL SENSOR NO CAL SIGNAL
65
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
Open or short in VNT-2 solenoid circuit.
Brake switch sense circuit malfunction.
An open or short condition is d etected in the manifold tuning valve solenoid control circuit. Incorrect input state detected for the power steering switch circuit. PL: High pressure seen at high speed.
BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Incorrect input state detected in the b rake switch circuit.
NO MIC CCD MESSAGES
No CCD/J1850 messages received from the MIC module.
NO SKIM CCD MESSAGES
No CCD/J1850 messages received from the SKIM module.
PCM: NO CCD MESSAGES
No CCD messages received by the control module.
PCM: NO EATX CCD MESSAGES
No CCD messages are received from the EATX or the Aisin transmission controller.
PCM: NO BODY CCD MESSAGES
No CCD messages are received from the body control module.
VNT A-SIDE FAILURE
MAP reading is above boost goal for an extended period of time.
GLOW PLUG RLY CKT OPEN/SHORT
An open or short is detected in the glow plug relay control circuit.
WAIT TO START LAMP CIRCUIT
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
An open or shorted condition detected in the Wait to Start Lamp circuit.
Page 189
Engine DTCs
EEC DTC
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTOR
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
68
EGR SYSTEM
Diesel EGR Control Module not active or a fault condition of the dedicated EGR sensors and/or EGR solenoid was detected by the EGR control module.
71
5 VOLT OUTPUT LOW
The 5 volt supply to the sensors is below the acceptable level. This is internal to the EEC only and may not be a 5 volt loss to the sensors.
AUX 5 VOLT OUTPUT LOW
Auxiliary 5 volt sensor feed is sensed to b e below an acceptable limit.
72
CAT TEMP SNSR VOLTAGE HIGH
Catalyst temperature sensor circuit shorted high.
CAT TEMP SNSR VOLTAGE LOW
Catalyst temperature sensor circuit shorted low.
CATALYST OVERHEAT COND
A catalyst overheat condition has been detected by the catalyst temperature sensor.
CATALYST 1/1 EFFICIENCY LOW
Catalyst 1/1 efficiency below required level.
CATALYST BANK 2 EFFICIENCY LOW
Catalyst 2/1 efficiency below required level.
76
BALLAST BYPASS RELAY CIRCUIT
An open or shorted condition is detected in the speed control servo power control circuit. Bypass relay in opposite state from commanded state.
77
S/C POWER RELAY CIRCUIT
88
START OF FAULT CODES
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
An open or shorted condition in the speed control power relay circuit is detected. Start of diagnostic fault codes in CDR mode. This code must appear first in the diagnostic mode or fault codes are inaccurate.
Page 190
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
MODEL YEARS 1998 AND LATER DTCs that are supported by Chrysler vehicles for model years 1998 and later are listed and described in the following chart. The P-code that is listed in the left column is the DTC number that conform s to SAE standards while the hexadecimal value listed in parentheses is strictly used by Chrysler. The hexadecimal value is used specifically in the Snapshot mode for model year 1998 and some 1999 vehicles because they are referenced in the service literature to uniquely identify a Diagnostic Trouble Code.
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0030 (ED)
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 HEATER RELAY CKT
P0036 (EE)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 HEATER RELAY CKT
P0106 (3C)
BARO PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE
P0107 (24)
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0108 (25)
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0112 (39)
IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0113 (3A)
IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0116 (E0)
COOLNT TEMP SNSR PERFORMANCE
P0117 (1E)
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0118 (1F)
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0121 (84)
TPS SIGNAL DIFFERS WITH MAP
P0122 (1A)
TPS/APPS VOLTAGE LOW
P0123 (1B)
TPS/APPS VOLTAGE HIGH
P0125 (80)
CLO TEMP NOT REACHED
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0131 (9B)
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 VOLTAGE LOW
P0132 (3E)
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 VOLTAGE HIGH
P0133 (66)
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE
P0134 (20)
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 INACTIVE
P0135 (67)
UPSTREAM O2S 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT
P0137 (9C)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 VOLTAGE LOW
P0138 (7E)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 VOLTAGE HIGH
P0139 (68)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 SLOW RESPONSE
P0140 (81)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 INACTIVE
P0141 (69)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/2 HEATER CIRCUIT
P0143 (90)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 VOLTAGE LOW
P0144 (93)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 VOLTAGE HIGH
P0145 (9F)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 SLOW RESPONSE
P0146 (AC)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 INACTIVE
P0147 (BD)
DNSTREAM O2S 1/3 HEATER CIRCUIT
P0151 (B5)
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 EFFICIENCY
P0152 (42)
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 VOLTAGE HIGH
P0153 (7A)
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 SLOW RESPONSE
P0154 (41)
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 INACTIVE
P0155 (7C)
UPSTREAM O2S 2/1 HEATER CIRCUIT
Page 191
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0157 (B6)
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 VOLTAGE LOW
P0201 (15)
INJECTOR 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0158 (7F)
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 VOLTAGE HIGH
P0202 (14)
INJECTOR 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0159 (7B)
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 SLOW RESPONSE
P0203 (13)
INJECTOR 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0160 (82)
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 INACTIVE
P0204 (3D)
INJECTOR 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0161 (7D)
DNSTREAM O2S 2/2 HEATER CIRCUIT
P0205 (45)
INJECTOR 5 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0165 (8F)
STARTER RELAY CKT OPEN/SHORT
P0206 (46)
INJECTOR 6 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0168
INJECTION PUMP HIGH FUEL TEMP.
P0207 (4F)
INJECTOR 7 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0171 (77)
FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN CONDITION
P0208 (50)
INJECTOR 8 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0172 (76)
FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH CONDITION
P0209 (37)
INJECTOR 9 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0174 (79)
FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN CONDITION
P0210 (38)
INJECTOR 10 CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0175 (78)
FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH CONDITION
P0215
FUEL INJ. PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0176 (64)
FLEX FUEL SENSOR NO CAL SIGNAL
P0216
FUEL INJ. PUMP TIMING FAILURE
P0177
WATER IN FUEL DETECTED
P0217
ENGINE OVERHEAT CONDITION
P0178 (55)
FLEX FUEL SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0219
CKP SENSOR OVERSPEED SIGNAL
P0178
WATER/FUEL SNSR DETECTED (diesel)
P0222
IDLE VALIDATION SIGNALS BOTH LOW
P0179 (54)
FLEX FUEL SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0223
IDLE VALIDATION SIGNALS BOTH HI
P0180
FUEL INJ. PUMP TEMP. RANGE
P0230
TRANSFER PMP CKT OUT OF RANGE
P0181
FUEL INJ. PUMP FAILURE
P0232
FUEL SHUTOFF SIGNALS HIGH
P0182 (5E)
CNG TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0234
TURBO BOOST LIMIT EXCEEDED
P0183 (5F)
FLEX FUEL SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0236
MAP SENSOR HIGH TOO LONG
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 192
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0237
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0336
CKP SENSOR SIGNAL
P0238
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0340 (01)
CMP SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0251
FUEL INJ. PUMP VALVE FEEDBACK
P0341
CMP SENSOR SIGNAL
P0253
FUEL INJ. PUMP FUEL VALVE OPEN
P0350 (C6)
IGN COIL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT
P0254
FUEL INJ. PUMP HIGH CURRENT
P0351 (2B)
IGNITION COIL 1 CIRCUIT
P0300 (6A)
MULTIPLE CYL MISFIRE
P0352 (2A)
IGNITION COIL 2 CIRCUIT
P0301 (6B)
CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
P0353 (29)
IGNITION COIL 3 CIRCUIT
P0302 (6C)
CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE
P0354 (4C)
IGNITION COIL 4 CIRCUIT
P0303 (6D)
CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE
P0355 (4D)
IGNITION COIL 5 CIRCUIT
P0304 (6E)
CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE
P0356 (D8)
IGNITION COIL 6 CIRCUIT
P0305 (AE)
CYLINDER 5 MISFIRE
0357 (E3)
IGNITION COIL 7 CIRCUIT
P0306 (AF)
CYLINDER 6 MISFIRE
P0358 (E4)
IGNITION COIL 8 CIRCUIT
P0307 (B0)
CYLINDER 7 MISFIRE
P0370
FUEL INJ. PUMP SPEED/POS. SNSR
P0308 (B1)
CYLINDER 8 MISFIRE
P0380
INTK AIR HEATER RELAY 1
P0309 (B2)
CYLINDER 9 MISFIRE
P0381
WAIT/START LAMP INOPERATIVE
P0310 (B3)
CYLINDER 10 MISFIRE
P0382
INTK AIR HEATER RELAY 2
P0320 (28)
IGNITION REF/CRANK CKT
P0387
CKP SENSOR LOW SUP PLY VOLTS
P0320
NO RPM SIGNAL TO PCM (diesel)
P0388
CKP SENSOR HI SUPPLY VOLTS
P0325 (3B)
KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
P0400 (8C)
EGR SYSTEM
P0330 (53)
KNOCK SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT
P0401 (2E)
EGR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE FAIL
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 193
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0403 (11)
EGR SOLENOID DRIVER CIRCUIT
P0505 (19)
IAC (AIS) MOTOR CIRCUIT
P0404 (D7)
EGR POSIT SENSOR PERFORMANCE
P0522 (EB)
OIL PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0405 (D4)
EGR POSIT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0523 (EC)
OIL PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0406 (D5)
EGR POSIT SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0524
OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW
P0412 (33)
SECONDARY AIR SWITCHING CKT
P0545
A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT
P0420 (70)
CATALYST 1/1 EFFICIENCY LOW
P0551 (73)
POWER STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
P0432 (B4)
CATALYST BANK 2 EFFICIENCY
P0562
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW
P0441 (71)
EVAP SYSTEM FLOW MALFUNCTION
P0563
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH
P0442 (A0)
EVAP SYSTEM SMALL LEAK
P0600 (44)
PCM INTERNAL COMM. FAILURE
P0443 (12)
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
P0601 (02)
PCM INTERNAL SELF TEST FAIL
P0455 (A1)
EVAP SYSTEM GROSS LEAK
P0602
ECM FUELING CALIB. ERROR
P0456 (F1)
EVAP SYSTEM VERY SMALL LEAK
P0606
ECM FAILURE
P0460 97
FUEL LEVEL SNSR NO VOLT CHANGE
P0622 (0B)
ALTERNATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT
P0460
FUEL LEVEL UNIT NO CHANGE-MILES (diesel)
P0645 (10)
A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT
P0461 (F4)
FUEL LEVEL SNSR PERFORMANCE
P0700 (89)
EATX DTC PRESENT
P0461
FUEL LEVEL UNIT NO CHANGE-TIME (diesel)
P0703 (98)
BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
P0711 (A4)
TRANS TEMP SNSR CIRCUIT
P0711
TRANS TEMP SNSR TEMP NOT RISE (diesel)
P0712 (4A)
TRAN TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0713 (4B)
TRAN TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0720 (A6)
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0462 (95)
FUEL LEVEL SNSR VOLTAGE LOW
P0463 (96)
FUEL LEVEL SNSR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0500 (23)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0500
VEHICLE SPD SNSR NO SIGNAL (diesel)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 194
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0720
OSS LOW RPM (diesel)
P1197 (C2)
DN O2S 1/2 SLOW DURING CAT MON.
P0740 (94)
TCC (PTU) LOCKUP NO RPM DROP
P1198 (C9)
RADIATOR SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P0743 (0C)
TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT
P1199 (C8)
RADIATOR SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P0743
TCC SOLENOID/ TRANS RELAY CKT (diesel)
P1281 (21)
LOW ENGINE TEMPERATURE
P0748 (AB)
GOV PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
P1282 (65)
FUEL PUMP RELAY CKT OPEN/SHORT
P0748
GOV. PRESS SOL/ TRANS RELAY CKT (diesel)
P1283
IDLE SELECT SIGNAL INVALID
P0751 (BC)
OVERDRIVE SWITCH LOW RATIONALITY
P1284
FUEL INJ. PUMP VOLTAGE RANGE
P0753 (32)
OVERDRIVE SOLENOID DRIVER
P1285
FUEL INJ. PUMP RELAY ALWAYS ON
P0753
3-4 SHIFT SOL/ TRANS RELAY CKT (diesel)
P1286
APPS SUPPLY CKT VOLTAGE HIGH
P0756 (C7)
SHIFT SOL B FUNCTIONAL FAULT
P1287
FUEL INJ. PUMP VOLTAGE LOW
P0783 (A5)
3-4 SHIFT MALFUNCTION
P1288 (D9)
SHORT RUN VALVE OPEN/SHORT CKT
P0783
3-4 SHIFT SOL, NO RPM DROP AT SHFT (diesel)
P1289 (58)
MTV SOLENOID OPEN/SHORT CKT
P0801 (C4)
REV GEAR LOCKOUT CIRCUIT
P1290 (BE)
CNG SYSTEM PRESSURE HIGH
P0833 (F0)
CLUTCH UPSTOP SW PERFORMANCE
P1291 (A2)
HEATED AIR INTAKE CIRCUIT
P1110
IAT SENSOR HIGH TEMPERATURE
P1291
INTK AIR HEATERS NO TEMP RISE (diesel)
P1192 (F2)
INLET AIR TEMP SNSR LO VOLTAGE
P1292 (62)
CNG PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
P1193 (F3)
INLET AIR TEMP SNSR HI VOLTAGE
P1293 (63)
CNG PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P1194 (E9)
O2 HEATER CKT PERFORMANCE
P1294 (8A)
TARGET IDLE NOT REACHED
P1195 (C0)
UP O2S 1/1 SLOW DURING CAT MON.
P1295 (88)
TP SENSOR NO 5V REFERENCE
P1196 (C1)
UP O2S 2/1 SLOW DURING CAT MON.
P1295
APPS SUPPLY CKT VOLTAGE LOW (diesel)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 195
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P1296 (87)
MAP SENSOR NO 5V REFERENCE REFERENCE
P1484 (C3)
CATALYST OVERHEAT COND
P1297 (27)
MAP SIGNAL NO PRESS CHANGE
P1485 (DA)
AIR ASST SOL CKT OPEN/SHORT CKT
P1298 (83)
LEAN CONDITION DURING WOT
P1486 (BB)
EVAP LDP SYSTEM HOSE PINCHED
P1299 (91)
VACUUM LEAK DETECTED
P1486
EVAP LEAK MON. PINCHED HOSE (diesel)
P1388 (0A)
ASD RELAY CIRCUIT
P1487 (8B)
HI SPEED FAN 2 CKT OPEN/SHORT
P1389 (2C)
ASD RELAY NO VOLT VOLT AT AT PCM
P1488 (B9)
AUX 5 VOLT OUTPUT LOW
P1390 (85)
CMP/CKP TIMING
P1489 (5D)
HIGH SPEED FAN RELAY OPEN/SHORT
P1391 (9D)
LOSS OF CAM OR CRANK SIGNAL
P1490 (5C)
LOW SPEED FAN RELAY OPEN/SHORT
P1398 (BA)
NO CRANKSHAFT SENSOR LEARN
P1491 (0E)
RADIATOR FAN RELAY CIRCUIT
P1399 (A3)
WAIT TO START LAMP CIRCUIT
P1492 (9A)
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE VOLTAGE HIGH
P1403 (D6)
LOSS OF 5V FEED TO EGR SENSOR
P1493 (99)
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P1475
AUX 5 VOLT OUTPUT HIGH
P1494 (B8)
LEAK DET PUMP PRESS SNSR SW
P1476 (6F)
SECONDARY AIR LOW FLOW
P1495 (B7)
LEAK DET PUMP SOLENOID CKT
P1477 (9E)
SECONDARY AIR HIGH FLOW
P1496 (92)
5 VOLT OUTPUT LOW
P1478 (47)
AAT AAT SENSOR CIRCUIT
P1498 (C5)
HIGH SPEED FAN 3 CIRCUIT
P1479 (E6)
TRANS FAN RELAY R ELAY OPEN/SHORT CKT
P1594 (06)
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE VOLTAGE HIGH
P1480 (E5)
PCV SOLENOID OPEN/SHORT CKT
P1595 (0F)
S/C SERVO SOLENOID CKT
P1481 (DD)
EATX RPM PULSE PERFORMANCE
P1596 (56)
MUX S/C SWITCH VOLT INPUT HIGH
P1482 (DC)
CAT TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P1597 (57)
MUX S/C SWITCH VOLT INPUT LOW
P1483 (DB)
CAT TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE VOLTAGE HIGH
P1598 (5A)
A/C PRESS SENSOR VOLT INPUT HIGH
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 196
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
DTC
DTC DESCRIPTION
P1599 (5B)
A/C PRESS SENSOR VOLT INPUT LOW
P1756
GOV. PR PRESS SO SOL. NOT TARGET TARGET PSI (diesel) (diesel)
P1682 (05)
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW
P1757 (8E)
GOV ZERO PRESSURE MALF.
P1683 (52)
S/C POWER RELAY CIRCUIT
P175 1757
GOV. PR PRESSURE AT AT 0 MPH IN GEAR (diesel)
P1685 (E8)
SKIM INVALID KEY
P1762 (A9)
GOV PRESSURE SENSOR OFFSET
P1686 (E2)
NO SKIM BUS MESSAGE
P1763 (A8)
GOV PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE VOLTAGE HIGH
P1687 (E1)
NO MIC BUS MESSAGE
P1764 (A7)
GOV PRESS SENSOR VOLTAGE LOW
P1689
ECM/INJ. PUMP NO COMMUNICA COMMUNICATION
P1765 (AD)
TRANS VOLTAGE VOLTAGE RELAY CIRCUIT
P1690
INJ. PU PUMP/ECM CKP NOT AGREE
P176 1765
TRANS 12V SUPPLY RELAY CIRCUIT (diesel)
P1691
INJ PU PUMP CN CNTRLLR CALIB. ERROR
P1899 (72)
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH CIRCUIT
P1693 (DF)
MIL FAULT IN ENG COMPANION MODULE
P1899
P/N SWITCH STUCK (diesel)
P1694 (DE)
FAULT IN ENGINE COMPANION MODULE
P1694
NO BUS MESSAGES FROM COMP. MOD. (diesel)
P1695 (61)
PCM: NO BODY CCD MESSAGES
P1696 (31)
EEPROM WRITE DENIED
P1697 (30)
SRI/EMR MILEAGE NOT STORED
P1698 (60)
PCM: NO EATX CCD MESSAGES
P1698
NO BU BUS ME MESSAGES FROM PCM (diesel)
P1719 (22)
2-3 GEAR LOCKOUT CIRCUIT
P1740 (E7)
TCC OR O/D SOL. PERFORMANCE
P1756 (8D)
GOV MID PRESSURE MALFUNCTION
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 197
EATX DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EATX DTCS Listed below are transmission DTCs for all 41TE, 41TE, 42LE, 42RLE, and 45RFE transmissions.
EATX DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTORS
DESCRIPTION
10
P0602
CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR
11
P0613 P0700
INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAILURE
An internal EATX controller failure has been detected.
12
P1684 P1792
BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED
Battery has been disconnected within the last 75 ignition cycles or quick learn test has been performed.
13
P0613 P0700
INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAILURE
An internal EATX controller failure has been detected.
14
P0891 P1767
EATX RELAY ALWAYS ON
EATX controller has determined that the EATX relay is always on.
15
P0888 P1768
EATX RELAY ALWAYS ON
EATX controller has determined that the EATX relay is always off
16
P0605
INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAILURE
An internal EATX controller failure has been detected.
17
P0604
INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAILURE
An internal EATX controller failure has been detected.
18
P0725
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
An engine speed sensor circuit failure has been detected.
19
P0600 P1694 P1716
NO DAT DATA FROM ENGINE CONTRLR
A problem has been detected with CCD bus communication from the engine controller.
20
P0890 P1765
SWITCHED BATTERY
A problem has been detected with the switched battery voltage circuit.
21
P0871 P1781
OD PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
A problem has been detected with the OD pressure switch circuit.
22
P0846 P1782
2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Problem with the 2-4 pressure switch circuit.
2-4/OD PRESSURE SWITCHCIRCUIT
Problem with the 2-4/OD pressure switch circuit.
LR PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Problem with the LR pressure switch circuit.
LR/OD PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Problem with the LR/OD pressure switch circuit.
23
24
25
P0841 P1784
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 198
EATX DTCs
EATX DTC
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTORS
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
26
LR/2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Problem with the LR/2-4 pressure switch circuit.
27
ALL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUITS
Problem with all pressure switch circuits.
28
P0705 P0706
SHIFT LEVER POSITION
Problem with the shift lever position switch.
29
P0120 P0124
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Problem with the Throttle Position Sensor.
2A
P0122
THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR LOW
The TPS voltage drops below 0.078 volts for at least 0.48 seconds.
2B
P0123
THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR HIGH
The TPS voltage rises above 4.94 volts for at least 0.48 seconds.
31
P0870 P1787
OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH
Problem with the Overdrive Pressure Switch circuit.
32
P0845 P1788
2-4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH
Problem with the 2-4 Pressure Switch circuit.
33
P0992 P1789
OD/2-4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH
Problem with the OD/2-4 Pressure Switch circuit.
35
P0944 P1791
CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL
Transaxle hydraulic pump has allowed a loss of prime condition. Possible causes are low fluid, clogged filter, or missing filter o-ring.
36
P1790
FAULT AFTER SHIFT
Problem with Turbine and Output shaft speeds immediately after shift.
37
P1775
SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE
Problem with the Solenoid Switch Valve Valve circuit.
38
P0740
LOCKUP CONTROL
Problem with the Lockup control circuit.
GEAR RATIO ERROR
EATX controller has detected abnormal input to output shaft speed ratio error.
39
41
P0750
LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Problem with the Low Reverse Solenoid Control Circuit.
42
P0755
2-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Problem with the 2-4 Solenoid Control Circuit.
43
P0760
OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Problem with the Overdrive Solenoid Control Circuit.
44
P0765
UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT
Problem with the Underdrive Solenoid Control Circuit.
45
P0613 P1795
INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAILURE
An internal EATX controller failure has been detected.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 199
EATX DTCs
EATX DTC 46
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTORS 3-4 SHIFT ABORT
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) 3-4 Upshift is interrupted by the EATX controller.
47
P1776
SSV LATCHED IN LR POSITION
Solenoid Shift Valve is latched in the Low/Reverse position.
48
P1793
TORQUE REDUCTION LINK ERROR
Transaxle torque management system has not received correct message from PCM. Possible causes are CCD bus communication failure or sticky TP sensor.
50
P0736
TURBINE/OUTPUT SPEED ERR IN REV
Turbine to Output shaft ratio does not compare with reverse gear ratio.
51
P0731
TURBINE/OUTPUT SPEED ERR IN 1ST
Turbine to Output shaft ratio does not compare with first gear ratio.
52
P0732
TURBINE/OUTPUT SPEED ERR IN 2ND
Turbine to Output shaft ratio does not compare with second gear ratio.
53
P0733
TURBINE/OUTPUT SPEED ERR IN 3RD
Turbine to Output shaft ratio does not compare with third gear ratio
54
P0734
TURBINE/OUTPUT SPEED ERR IN 4TH
Turbine to Output shaft ratio does not compare with fourth gear ratio.
55
P1736
TURBINE/OUTPUT SPD ERR IN NEUTR
Problem with the Turbine or Output Shaft speed in neutral.
55
P1736
GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND PRIME GEAR
Input RMP to Output RPM ratio does not compare with the 2nd prime gear ratio.
56
P0715
TURBINE SENSOR ERROR
Problem with the Turbine Sensor circuit.
57
P0720
OUTPUT SENSOR ERROR
Problem with the Output Sensor circuit.
58
P1794
SENSOR GROUND ERROR
Problem with the Sensor Ground circuit.
60
P1770
INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOL: LR
Low hydraulic volume has been detected with the LowReverse clutch.
61
P1771
INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOL: 2-4
Low hydraulic volume has been detected with the 2-4 clutch.
61
P1771
INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOL: 2C
Low hydraulic volume has been detected with the 2C clutch.
62
P1772
INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOL: OD
Low hydraulic volume has been detected with the Overdrive clutch.
63
P1773
INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOL: UD
Low hydraulic volume has been detected with the Underdrive clutch.
64
P1735
INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOL: 4C
Low hydraulic volume has been detected with the 4C clutch.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 200
EATX DTCs
EATX DTC
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTORS
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
65
P1715
RESTRICTED MANUAL VALVE IN T3
The TCM senses the LR pressure switch closing while performing PEMCC or FEMCC with the shifter in the temp3 zone.
69
P0952
AUTOSTICK INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
The transmission is not in Autostick position while the upshift or downshift switch is reported to be closed (below 0.3 volts) or if both are closed simultaneously.
70
P0953 P1796
AUTOSTICK INPUT CIRCUIT FAILURE
Failure detected in Autostick input circuit or components.
71
P1797
TEMP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE
Autostick system has detected excessive fluid temperature.
72
P0710
THERM INPUT CIRCUIT
Not a valid DTC. Do not take any action.
73
P0897 P1798
WORN OUT/ BURNT TRANS FLUID
Converter clutch system has detected an abnormal turbine acceleration during FEMCC to PEMCC transition. Possible causes are degraded fluid or internal transmission problem
74
P1799
CALC. OIL TEMP IN USE
The calculated oil temperature is used for the shift schedule instead of the thermistor temperature.
75
P0218 P1738
HIGH TEMP OPER. ACTIVATED
The transmission oil temperature has risen above nominal operating temperature and the overheat shift schedule is activated
76
P0884 P1739
POWER UP AT SPEED
The Transmission Control Module has powered up while in the DRIVE position and the vehicle is going above 20 M.P.H.
77
P1687 P1717
NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE MIC
The TCM has not received any PCI bus messages from the MIC.
78
P0600 P1652
SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK MALFUNCTION
There are no PCI bus messages received by the TCM.
79
P0562 P1714
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
The TCM recognizes that the battery voltage has been less than 10 volts for 15 seconds.
7A
P0711
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
Transmission temperature does not reach normal operating temperature within the given amount of time.
7B
P0712
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW
Temperature sensor voltage drops below 0.078 volts fo r at least 0.45 seconds.
7C
P0713
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH
Temperature sensor voltage rises above 4.94 volts for at least 0.45 seconds.
7D
P0714
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT
Temperature sensor voltage changes suddenly within a predetermined time period.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 201
EATX DTCs
EATX DTC
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DISPLAY DESCRIPTORS
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
80
P1765
SWITCHED BATTERY FAILURE
The TCM senses voltage on any of the pressure switch inputs before the TCM energizes the relay.
81
P1784
LR PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch is open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear.
82
P1734
2C PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch is open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear.
84
P1781
OD PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch is open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear.
88
P1733
4C PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch is open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear.
90
P1732
UD PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch is open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear.
94
P0613
INTERNAL CONTROLLER (DUAL-PORT RAM FAILURE)
A2
P1728
2C HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch does not close when the TCM performs a pressure test.
A4
P1787
OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch does not close when the TCM performs a pressure test.
A8
P1727
4C HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch does not close when the TCM performs a pressure test.
B0
P1726
UD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
The pressure switch does not close when the TCM performs a pressure test.
C1
P0750
LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT ERROR
Solenoid continuity test failure.
C2
P0755
2C SOLENOID CIRCUIT ERROR
Solenoid continuity test failure.
C3
P0760
OD SOLENOID CIRCUIT ERROR
Solenoid continuity test failure.
C4
P0770
4C SOLENOID CIRCUIT ERROR
Solenoid continuity test failure.
C5
P0765
UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT ERROR
Solenoid continuity test failure.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 202
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
EATX DTC
DISPLAY DESCRIPTORS
DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED)
C6
P1737
MS SOLENOID CIRCUIT ERROR
Solenoid continuity test failure.
C8
P1720
LINE PRESSURE FAULT
The difference between the Actual and Desired Line Pressure is 10 psi or greater.
C9
P1722
LINE PRESSURE LOW
The Actual Line Pressure is more than 10 psi below the Desired Line Pressure.
CA
P1721
LINE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT
The Line Pressure Sensor Voltage is below 0.2 volts or above 4.75 volts.
CB
P1724
LINE PRESSURE HIGH
The Actual Line Pressure is more than 10 psi above the Desired Line Pressure.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 203
AISIN AW4 DTCs
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
AISIN AW4 DTCS 1997-2001 XJ AW4 TRANSMISSION DTCS Listed below are the transmission DTCs for 1997 and later Aisin AW4 transmissions. The number in parenthesis is the hexadecimal DTC number specific to Chrysler.
P-CODE
DTC DESCRIPTION
P0121 (84)
TPS SENSOR
P0122 (BB)
TPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT
P0562 (C1,EE)
TRANSMISSION VOLTAGE LOW
P0563 (C2,EF)
TRANSMISSION VOLTAGE HIGH
P0604 (CC)
RAM INTEGRITY FAILURE
P0605 (CB)
ROM CHECKSUM FAILURE
P0700 (89)
TRANSMISSION FAULT PRESENT
P0705 (BC,EB)
TRANS RANGESNSR SIGNAL
P0715 (B9)
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
P0720 (A6,BA)
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
P0740 (94,B8)
TCC SOLENOID FUNCTIONAL FAULT
P0751 (B2,CE)
SHIFT SOLENOID 1 FUNCTIONAL FAULT
P0756 (C7,B5)
SHIFT SOLENOID 2 FUNCTIONAL FAULT
P1694 (BD,BE, CD)
NO CDD MESSAGES FROM JTEC
P1698 (60)
NO CDD MESSAGES FROM AW4 MODULE
P1718 (C4)
EEPROM FAILURE
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 204
AISIN AW4 DTCs
P-CODE
B. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions
DTC DESCRIPTION
P1742 (C0,CB)
ROM CHECKSUM FAILURE
P1743 (BF,CC)
RAM INTEGRITY FAILURE
P1744 (B1,D0)
SHIFT SOLENOID 1 SHORT TO GROUND
P1745 (B0,D1)
SHIFT SOLENOID 1 SHORT TO VOLTAGE
P1746 (B4,D2)
SHIFT SOLENOID 2 SHORT TO GROUND
P1747 (B3,D3)
SHIFT SOLENOID 2 SHORT TO VOLTAGE
P1748 (B7,EC)
TCC SOLENOID SHORT TO GROUND
P1749 (B6,ED)
TCC SOLENOID SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(89)
TRANSMISSION DTC PRESENT
(EA)
SHIFT SOLENOID A FUNCTIONAL FAULT
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 205
C. DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
The tester is capable of displaying a wide variety of engine or transmission data parameters in the F0: Data List mode. The engine or transmission controller sends information to the tester regarding the state of the system as the controller sees it. The tester translates and displays this information in the form of a list of diagnostic data parameters. This chapter describes those parameters. There are two basic types of data parameters: discrete and analog. Discrete parameters are bits of information and can be in only one of four distinct states (high/low, energized/de-energized, on/off, P/NGear). Switches and solenoids are examples of discrete parameters. Analog parameters are used to represent quantities and are displayed as a value with appropriate uni ts. Examples of analog parameters include Engine Speed, Coolant Temperature, and Oxygen Sensor Voltage.
Engine Systems Parameters Engine system data parameters are those parameters that are supported by the SBEC I, II, III, JTEC, and NGC controllers. They do not include parameters supported by the A604 (41TE), A606 (42LE), 45RFE, or Aisin (AW4) transmission. A description of each parameter, the units, the range of the analog parameters, and the state of the discrete parameters are provided beginning on page 207.
Transmission Systems Parameters Transmission system data parameters are those parameter s that are supported by the A604 (41TE), A606 (42LE), 45RFE, or Aisin (AW4) transmission. They do not include parameters supported by the engine controllers. A description of each parameter, the units, the range of the analog parameters, and the state of the discrete parameters are provided beginning on page 229.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 206
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
ENGINE SYSTEM PARAMETERS 2/3 LOCKOUT SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
2/3 Lockout Solenoid is an output from the EEC which controls the 2/3 gear operation.
A/C CLUTCH RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The A/C clutch relay engages and disengages the air conditioning compressor. It is combined with the A/C switch on later models.
A/C CONTROL RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
A/C Control Relay is an output from the EEC to indicate to state of the controlled circuit.
A/C CUTOUT RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
A/C Cutout Relay is an EEC output which controls the voltage to the A/C compressor as a result of the throttle position sensor.
A/C HIGH SIDE PRESSURE
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 500
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This parameter monitors the pressure of the air conditioning refrigerant.
A/C HIGH SIDE SENSOR
Air conditioning high side sensor displays the input voltage to the air conditioning pressure sensor.
A/C REQUEST
STATES ON/OFF
A/C Request input is high when the instrument panel switch, pressure switch, and evaporator switch are all closed, and low when these conditions are not met.
A/C SELECT
STATES ON/OFF
When the A/C Switch is in t he ON position, an input signal infor ms the EEC that the A/C has been selected. The EEC adjusts the RPM to compensate for the increased engine load.
A/C SWITCH
STATES HIGH/LOW
The A/C switch informs the EEC when the air conditioning is ON so the EEC can increase the idle speed to compensate for the additional compressor load on the engine.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 207
Engine System Parameters
AAT (°) (AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE)
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES C
-40 – 127
DEGREES F
-40 – 260
Ambient air temperature is the temperature of the battery and underhood air as determined by the battery temperature sensor.
AAT (V)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
Ambient air temperature sensor determines the temperature of the battery and underhood air as determined by the coolant temperature and inputs the information t o the EEC.
ACTUAL GOV PRESSURE
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 127
Actual Governor Pressure is an input value to the EEC based on the governor pressure transducer reading which provides feedback for regulation of the transmission governor pressure.
ADAPTIVE FUEL 2
UNITS
RANGE
µSEC
-1024 – 1016
Additive Fuel 2 is the adaptive adjustment to fuel injector on-time calibrated at idle conditions due to various inputs.
ADDED ADAPTIVE FUEL
UNITS
RANGE
µSEC
0 – 2040
The adaptive adjustment to fuel injector on-time calibrated at idle conditions.
AIR SWITCH SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
This solenoid controls vacuum to the switch relief valve. Before the engine warms enough to go into closed loop, vacuum is applied to the valve directing air from the air pump upstream into the exhaust manifold. Once the engine has warmed up and is in closed loop, the vacuum to the switch is removed allowing the air pump to direct air downstream into the catalyt ic converter.
ALTERNATOR LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
If the EEC senses a low charging condition in the charging system, it illuminates the Generator Lamp.
ASD RELAY SENSE
STATES HIGH/LOW
A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the EEC that the ASD relay has been activated. If the signal is not seen when the ASD relay should be activated, a DTC is set.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 208
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
AUTO SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The ASD turns off the electric fuel pump if a distributor pickup signal is not received by the ASD within two seconds after the ignition is turned on. The ASD relay should be energized when the engine is running.
AVERAGE O2S SIGNAL
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 1V
Average Oxygen Sensor Signal displays the input analog oxygen sensor voltage f or the upstream O2S. The vehicle PCM categorizes the input oxygen sensor voltage as an average voltage value over a period of time. This is helpful to identify a lazy or biased O2 sensor. The O2S voltage signal is a measure of oxygen in the exhaust emission gases that surround the sensor tip.
AVERAGE O2S STATE
STATES RICH/LEAN
Average Oxygen Sensor State displays t he converted analog oxygen sensor voltage in t wo discrete states, RICH or LEAN. The vehicle PCM categorizes the input upstream oxygen sensor voltage into the two r ich or lean categories using a programmed threshold (above threshold is rich state, below is lean state).
B1 VOLTAGE SENSE
STATES HIGH/LOW
B1 voltage input is high when the ignition switch is in the Run position, and low when the ignition switch is in the START position.
BARO (kPa, IN. HG)
UNITS
RANGE
KPa
0 – 101
in. Hg
0 – 30
The current altitude (atmospheric pressure) of the vehicle is determined by the MAP sensor. For TBI and Turbo models, the reading is obtained in the Key On, Engine Off setting.
BARO READ SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Turbo models periodically take altitude or BARO readings by utilizing the BARO READ solenoid. This is accomplished during deceleration when the BARO solenoid closes long enough for the engine computer to read altitude or BARO.
BATTERY TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
The battery temperature is used by the EEC to vary the charging voltage rate; the colder the battery, the higher the charging rate and the higher the sensor voltage.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 209
Engine System Parameters
BATTERY VOLTAGE
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 15.75
Battery Voltage is an analog input signal read by the EEC. It is mainly used for diagnostics. Certain EEC functions such as fuel injector pulse width and alternator field control are modified if the battery voltage falls below or rises above programmed thresholds.
BOOST PRESSURE (TURBO)
UNITS
RANGE
kPa
0 – 200
PSI
0 – 29
The amount of Turbo boost pressure required is determined by the MAP sensor: Boost = MAP - BARO.
BOOST PRESSURE GOAL
UNITS
RANGE
kPa
0 – 200
PSI
0 – 29
The boost level above barometric pressure at which the engine controller is attempting to maintain MAP.
BRAKE SWITCH
STATES HIGH/LOW
The brake switch signals the EEC in the event that the Throttle Position Sensor fails to indicate a closed throttle condition.
CAM/CRANK SYNC
STATES CAM ONLY/CRANK ONLY/CAM PASS/ CKP PASS/IN SYNC
This parameter displays the status of the cam and crank signals. If both the camshaft signal and crankshaft signals are present, the parameter displays IN SYNC.
CHARGE SYSTEM GOAL
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 15.75V
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This parameter indicates the charging system target voltage.
CHARGE TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE
This is the sensor voltage corresponding to the charge temperature. The colder the temperature, the higher the voltage.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 210
Engine System Parameters
CHARGE TEMPERATURE (MFI & TURBO)
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES C
-40 – 127
DEGREES F
-40 – 261
On some models, the O2 feedback system requires both air/fuel mixture temperature and coolant temperature. Therefore, a temperature sensor mounted to the intake manifold measures the air/fuel mixture temperature.
CHECK ENGINE LAMP
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
If the EEC detects a fault in any of its most vital circuits, the Check Engine lamp comes on and the EEC system goes into the limp-in mode. The light stays off when the fault is corrected. The code is erased from the EEC memory after thirty ignition cycles from the last occurrence of the fault.
CHECK GAUGES LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
The EEC illuminates the Check Gauges Lamp when a gauge value is out of normal operating range
CKP COUNTER
RANGE 0 – 255
The CKP Counter parameter is used by the PCM to detect the crankshaft sensor pulse. The PCM uses the signal for determination of spark and/or fuel injection. Under normal conditions, the count increases.
CLOSED THROTTLE SWITCH
STATES HIGH/LOW
Informs the EEC that the throttle is in the closed position (0.75V). Any position other than closed sends a >0.75 V signal to the EEC.
CMP COUNTER
RANGE 0 – 255
The CMP Counter parameter is used by the PCM to detect the camshaft position sensor signal. The PCM uses the signal to establish and maintain correct injector firing order. Under normal conditions, the count increases.
CNG PRESS SENSOR
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
CNG Pressure Sensor inputs the CNG pressure by voltage signal to the EEC.
CNG PRESSURE
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 255
CNG Pressure is the pressure of the fuel system after the pressure regulator as interpreted by the EEC.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 211
Engine System Parameters
CNG TEMPERATURE
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES C
-128 – 127
CNG Temperature is temperature of the compressed natural gas in the fuel system as interpreted by the EEC.
CNG TEMP SENSOR
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This sensor inputs the CNG temperature by voltage signal to the EEC.
COOLING FAN RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
On certain models, this relay supplies power for both the cooling fan motor and A/C compressor clutch. The relay is activated, and the fan turned on, when the A/C is turned on, or when the coolant temperature reaches a specified value.
DESIRED IAC
UNITS
RANGE
STEPS
0 – 255
Desired IAC is the EEC calculated stepper motor position that the EEC is trying to achieve.
DESIRED LDP SOLENOID
STATES VAC APPLY/VAC BLOCKED
The Desired Leak Detection Pump Solenoid displays the desired state of the LDP Solenoid as determined by the engine controller. When the solenoid is de-energized, engine vacuum is blocked and atmospheric pressure is allowed to enter the pump cavity. The Leak Detection Pump is used to detect an evaporative system leak and is only used with certain emission packages.
ECT (°)
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES C
-40 – 127
DEGREES F
-40 – 261
Engine Coolant Temperature is an analog input to the EEC. The EEC reads the voltage at the coolant temperature sensor and converts this voltage into temperature. The EEC uses engine coolant temperature to determine things such as air-fuel mixture, idle speed, and cooling fan operation.
ECT (V)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This is the engine coolant sensor voltage corresponding to the coolant temperature. The colder the temperature, the higher the voltage.
EGR DUTY CYCLE
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
This parameter displays the duty cycle of the control signal from the vehicle PCM to the EGR Solenoid. Display is in percent on-time.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 212
Engine System Parameters
EGR SENSE VOLTS
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
EGR Sensor Volts is the voltage received by the PCM from the EGR Sensor. Voltage is directly proportional to the EGR Valve opening.
EGR SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
This solenoid controls ported vacuum to the EGR valve. When it is energized by the logic module, vacuum to the EGR is blocked. The solenoid is energized when the coolant temperature is below 21 Deg C, the engine speed is less than 1,200 RPM, or the throttle is in the wide open position.
EI (DIS) SIG STAT
STATES NO C/C SIG, CAM ONLY, CRANK ONLY, CAM/CRANK, C/C IN-SYNC
Distributorless ignition system status information. Only valid during crank, this parameter indicates if there was a cam sensor signal, a crank sensor signal, or if both signals are in sync during cranking. Otherwise, no C/C SIG is displayed.
EMR LAMP
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Emissions Maintenance Reminder lamp is used on 1989 and later trucks and minivans. The lamp illuminates at predetermined odometer setting. Certain parts are to be replaced or certain maintenance performed at this time.
ENGINE LOAD
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
Calculated load value indicates the percent engine capacity that is being used. It is calculated from a measure of current engine airflow divided by engine peak airflow.
ENGINE SPEED
UNITS
RANGE
RPM
0 – 9999
The engine speed in RPM is determined from t he distributor reference pulses. The EEC uses engine speed to make determinations about the operation of various engine management components.
FAN DUTY CYCLE
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
This parameter displays the duty cycle of the control signal from the vehicle PCM to the fan relay. Display is in percent on-time.
FEEDBACK FACTOR 1/1
UNITS
RANGE
%
+25/-25
This output parameter is the feedback fuel control factor based on 02 sensor 1/1 input to the EEC.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 213
Engine System Parameters
FUEL LEVEL
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
GALLONS
0 – 31.9
This output parameter displays the fuel level of the vehicle as determined by the EEC.
FUEL LEVEL (%)
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
The FUEL LEVEL (%) parameter is used by the JTEC control module to monitor percentage of fuel within the fuel tank. This parameter is only applicable to 1999 and newer vehicles that have a JTEC engine controller.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
Fuel Level Sensor voltage is the voltage from the fuel level sensor that is input to the PCM. Fuel level voltage is an indication of the liquid fuel level in the fuel storage tank. Vehicles that have a JTEC engine controller, built in 1999 and newer, have a voltage range from 0.6V to 8.6V.
FUEL PUMP RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Battery voltage is applied to the Fuel Pump Relay when the igniti on key is ON. The relay is energized when a ground signal is provided by the EEC.
FUEL STATUS 1
STATES OL/CL/OL-DRIVE/OL-FAULT/CL-FAULT
Fuel Status 1 displays the current status of the feedback fuel control system for bank 1. Current status can be one of the above.
FUEL STATUS 2
STATES OL/CL/OL-DRIVE/OL-FAULT/CL-FAULT
Fuel Status 2 displays the current status of the feedback fuel control system for bank 2. Current status can be one of the above.
FUEL SYNCH PICK-UP
STATES HIGH/LOW
Input should be HIGH except when the fuel sync Hall effect switch is closed.
GLOW PLUG RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
When appropriate the EEC output energizes the Glow Plug Relay to warm the combustion chamber to aid in engine starting.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 214
Engine System Parameters
GOV PRESS SOL
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
Displays the EEC output duty cycle value of the Governor Pressure Solenoid, which regulates the transmission governor pressure.
HIGH SPEED FAN
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Depending on engine coolant temperature and A/C pressure, the EEC output operates the fan.
HIGH SPEED FAN 2
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Depending on engine coolant temperature and A/C pressure, the EEC output operates the fan.
IAC MOTOR POSITION
UNITS
RANGE
STEPS
0 – 255
The AIS motor, under the control of the EEC, operates a valve that controls airf low through a channel in the throttle body. This provides a preprogrammed idle speed for all operating conditions.
IAT (°)
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES C
-40 – 127
DEGREES F
-40 – 261
Intake air temperature is an analog input to the EEC. The EEC reads the voltage at the IAT Sensor and converts this into temperature. The EEC uses intake air temperature as one of its tools to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. If the IAT circuit fails, the EEC substitut es the IAT temperature.
IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This is the sensor voltage corresponding to the Intake Air Temperature. The colder the temperature, the higher the voltage.
IGNITION SENSE
STATES HIGH/LOW
Ignition Sense input tells the EEC that the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit.
IGNITION SWITCH
STATES ON/OFF
When the Ignition Switch i s in the START/RUN position, this EEC i nput allows power to be supplied t o the fuel pump relay, EEC, and the engine start er motor.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 215
Engine System Parameters
INJECTOR PULSE WIDTH
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
mSEC
0 – 131
The amount of time, expressed in milliseconds, that the injector is ON. The pulse width is determined by input from the MAP, RPM, TPS, O2 (in closed loop), charge temperature (during cold enrichment), speed sensor (during deceleration), and the fuel enrichment and enleanment multipliers programmed into the EEC.
INTAKE HEATER 1
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The EEC output determines if and how long to activate the intake manifold air heater element depending on the intake manifold air temperature.
INTAKE HEATER 2
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The EEC output determines if and how long to activate the intake manifold air heater element depending on the intake manifold air temperature.
KEY ON CYCLES
RANGE 0 – 127
Key On cycles refers to the number of times the ignition swi tch has been turned ON since the last faul t code was set. The counter is reset to 0 if the battery is disconnected, when a new fault code is set, when the fault codes are cleared, or after 30-50 Key On cycles from the last occurrence of a fault code.
KEY ON CYCLES 1
RANGE 0 – 127
The number of key on cycles since the latest fault was set or since all of the fault codes were erased.
KEY ON CYCLES 2
RANGE 0 – 127
The number of key on cycles since the 2nd latest fault was set or since all of the fault codes were erased.
KEY ON CYCLES 3
RANGE 0 – 127
The number of key on cycles since the 3rd latest fault was set or since all of the fault codes were erased.
KNOCK RETARD CYLINDERS #1 - #4
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREE
0 – 128
The amount of spark delay commanded by the EEC in response to a monitored knock condition.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 216
Engine System Parameters
KNOCK SENSOR VOLTAGE
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
The knock sensor is the piezoelectric type and is screwed into the intake manifold. It is tuned to a vibration frequency that is characteristic of detonation (spark knock). When the detonation frequency is detected, a signal is sent to the engine computer so the ignition timing can be adjusted to eliminate the knock. The knock sensor circuit is disarmed below 1000 RPM and during high vacuum conditions.
LEAK DETECTION PUMP SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
The LDP Switch is used to monitor the pump diaphragm position and sends the information to the engine controller. The state changes depending on the pump diaphragm position. If the pump diaphragm is in the down position, the switch is in a closed state and sends 12 volts to the PCM. The Leak Detection Pump is used to detect an evaporative system leak and is only used with certain emission packages.
LONG TERM ADAPTIVE
UNITS
RANGE
%
+50/-50
The percentage by which the fuel pulse width of each adaptive fuel cell is adjusted. This value changes continually with engine operating conditions.
LONG TERM ADAPT2
UNITS
RANGE
%
+50/-50
This is an EEC determined factor by which the fuel pulsewidth for bank #2 at each adaptive cell is adjusted.
LOW COOLANT LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
After receiving a signal of low coolant from the low coolant switch, the EEC outputs a message to illuminate the Low Coolant Lamp.
LOW COOLANT SW
STATES ON/OFF
This switch is signals the EEC when the coolant is below the acceptable level.
LOW PRES SHUTOFF
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Low Pressure Shutoff is an EEC output which controls the voltage to the A/C compressor as a result of the low A/C pressure.
LOW SPEED FAN
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Depending on engine coolant temperature and A/C pressure, the EEC operates the fan.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 217
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The MTV Solenoid regulates the supply of vacuum to the manifold tu ning valve during Wide Open Throttle below 3000 RPM.
MAP (kPa, IN. HG)
UNITS
RANGE
kPa
0 – 101
in. Hg
0 – 30
The MAP (P) sensor utilizes a piezoresistive-type pressure sensor to measure barometric pressure during periods of ignition on/engine off. MAP and BARO readings are converted to vacuum readings: VACUUM = BARO - MAP. The vacuum reading i s combined with the RPM reading to compare engine speed r elative to engine load. On fuel-injected models, injector pulse width is compared with vacuum to determine fuel delivery to engine load.
MAP (V)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
Barometric pressure and manifold vacuum (engine load) are supplied to the engine computer by MAP sensor voltage (V). High voltage (up to 4.9 volts) indicates a higher engine load. Low voltage (as low as 0.3 volt) indicates a lighter engine load (deceleration or cruising, for example). This information, along with information from several other sensors, is used by the EEC to determine the correct air/fuel mixture and spark advance.
MINIMUM TPS
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
A voltage signal from the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) informs the engine computer when the throttle is in the minimum (idle) throttle position. The EEC learns the minimum throttle position by remembering the lowest TPS voltage.
MISFIRE CYLINDER (CYLINDER #1-#10)
RANGE 0 – 255
This parameter displays the number of misfires counted by the vehicle engine controller. In order for the Misfire counter to work, the vehicle must have learned the Adaptive Numerator, have a load on the engine, and have no stored DTCs.
OIL PRESS LOW SW
STATES ON/OFF
This switch signals the EEC when the oil pressure is below the normal operating range.
OIL PRESSURE
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 255
Oil Pressure is the value read from the oil pressure sensor.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 218
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
UNITS
RANGE
RPM
0 – 5100
Oil Pressure Sensor sends the oil pressure by voltage signal to the EEC.
OUTPUT SHAFT
This parameter displays the speed of the transmission’s main drive shaft.
OVERDRIVE LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
Overdrive Lamp is controlled by a mounted push-button overdrive lamp switch. When the lamp is illuminated, the overdrive is disengaged.
OVERDRIVE OVERRIDE SWITCH
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Preset conditions of the ECT sensor and VSS must be met before the push-button switch is allowed to control overdrive operation. Overdrive is allowed when the lamp is not illuminated.
OVERDRIVE SOLENOID 3/4 SHIFT SOL
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
This solenoid is used for overdrive engagement. The EEC determines when to engage and disengage the overdrive solenoid by monitoring various inputs.
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER PULSE-WIDTH MODULATED
UNITS
RANGE
%
0-100
1/1 PWM O2 HTR 2/1 PWM O2 HTR 1/2 PWM O2 HTR 2/2 PWM O2 HTR Oxygen sensor heaters are used to achieve and maintain normal operating temperature for closed loop operation. The O2 Heater on vehicles using the NGC engine control module are controled by Pulse Width Modulation (PWM).
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
UP O2 HTR RELAY DOWN O2 HTR RELAY The O2 Heater Relays supply power to the oxygen sensor heater elements and allow the system to enter into closed loop operation sooner. The heater elements keep the oxygen sensors at the proper operatin g temperature during all operating modes.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 219
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
OXYGEN SENSOR STATE
STATES RICH/CENTER/LEAN
UPSTREAM O2S ST RIGHT UP O2S ST LEFT UP O2S ST DNSTREAM O2S ST RIGHT DN O2S ST
LEFT DOWN O2S ST PRE-CAT O2S ST POST-CAT O2S ST FRONT UP O2S ST REAR UP O2S ST
1/1 O2 SENSOR 2/1 O2 SENSOR 1/2 O2 SENSOR 2/2 O2 SENSOR
The EEC converts the analog oxygen sensor voltage to three discrete states: RICH, CENTER, or LEAN.
OXYGEN (O2) SENSOR VOLTAGE UPSTREAM O2S RIGHT UP O2S LEFT UP O2S DNSTREAM O2S LEFT DOWN O2S RIGHT DOWN O2S
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
PRE-CAT O2S POST-CAT O2S FRONT UP O2S REAR UP O2S FRONT DOWN O2S REAR DOWN O2S
The Oxygen Sensor, located in the exhaust stream, is one of the primary inputs to the fuel delivery system. Once the oxygen sensor is warmed up (> 500 degrees), the voltage normally fluctuates between a high voltage (> 450 mv), indicating a rich condition, and a low voltage (< 450 mv), indicating a lean condition. The O2 sensor remains at reference voltage (approximately 450 mv) if it is not at operating temperature. Please note that NGC vehicles use O2 sensors that supply a constant 2.5 volts. The normal operating range for an NGC O2 sensor is 2.5 to 3.5 volts.
NOTE
When testing the O2 sensor, the engine should be operated at > 1200 RPM to ensure that the sensor is sufficiently warmed up and that the emission control system is in the closed loop mode of operation.
PARK/NEUTRAL (P/N) SWITCH
STATES P/N or GEAR
This switch informs the EEC when the transmission is in Park or Neutral. This information affects idle speed and spark advance.
PRESENT GEAR
STATES P/N or 1 - 4
Displays the present gear of the transmission.
P/S SWITCH
STATES ON/OFF
The switch provides an input to the EEC during high pump load and low engine RPM; such as parking maneuvers. At high pressure the switch is open and the EEC adjusts idle air flow to prevent stalling.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 220
Engine System Parameters
PURGE CURRENT FEEDBACK
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
mA
0 – 670
Purge Current Feedback is the current (mA) value being applied to the Proportional Purge Solenoid that is sensed by the engine controller. The engine controller then adjusts the current to achieve the desired purge flow.
PURGE DUTY CYCLE
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
This parameter displays the duty cycle of the control signal from the vehicle PCM to the Purge Solenoid. Display is in percent on-time.
PURGE SOLENOID FLOW
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
Purge Solenoid Flow is the amount of purge flow displayed in percentage.
PURGE SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
This solenoid blocks the purge line when coolant temperature is below 82 deg C.
RADIATOR FAN LOW
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
Depending on engine coolant temperature and A/C pressure, the EEC operates the fan.
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
REV Lockout Solenoid is an output from the EEC which controls the reverse gear operation.
S/C CANCEL SWITCH
STATES ON/OFF
Speed control can be canceled with this selection. The state of S/C Cancel Switch is monitored be the EEC.
S/C COAST SWITCH
STATES ON/OFF
This parameter displays the status of the S/C Coast Switch.
S/C ENGAGED LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
The S/C Engaged Lamp is used to indicate to the operator when the vehicle speed control is engaged.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 221
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
S/C LAST CUTOUT, CUTOFF INFO 1
STATES see below
This parameter indicates the cause of the last S/C system cutout or disengagement. Causes can be one of t he following states: C: ON/OFF
S/C last cut-out by ON/OFF circuit.
LC: SPEED
S/C last cut-out by vehicle speed (too high or too low).
LC: RPM
S/C last cut-out by engine RPM (too high or too low).
LC: BK SW
S/C last cut-out by brake switch.
LC: P/N SW
S/C last cut-out by Park/Neutral switch.
LC: N/V
S/C last cut-out due to engine RPM to vehicle speed ratio error.
LC: CLUTCH
S/C last cut-out by clutch engagement.
LC: DTC
S/C last cut-out due to DTC in Cruise Control Logic.
LC: KEYCYCLE
S/C last cut-out by Key Cycle.
LC: S/C SW
S/C last cut-out by Speed Control Switch.
LC: CAN. SW
S/C last cut-out by cancel switch.
LC: THROT
S/C last cut-out by throttle limp-in.
LC: AUTOSTICK
S/C last cut-out by Autostick
S/C POWER RELAY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
When the EEC recognizes speed control is ON, it controls the S/C Power Relay to supply power to the speed control vacuum and vent servos to operate the speed control function.
S/C SENSOR
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5v
S/C Sensor is an input signal which notifies the EEC of the voltage being supplied to the Speed Control System.
S/C SET SPEED
UNITS
RANGE
MPH
0 – 128
This parameter displays the control speed at which the Speed Control is set. This always shows 0 if S/C is disengaged.
S/C STATUS, S/C INFO 1
STATES see below
This parameter shows the current Speed Control system operating state. As shown below, DIS indicates that the S/C system is disengaged, followed by the cause for disengagement. ENG. indicates that the S/C system is engaged, followed by the current mode. DIS: PWR ALY
S/C disabled by loss of power
DIS: AUTOSTICK
S/C disabled by Autostick
DIS: ON/OFF
S/C ON/OFF switch is in the off position.
DIS: SPEED
Vehicle speed is greater or less than the specified threshold.
DIS: RPM
The engine RPM was detected to be too low or too high.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 222
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
DIS: BRAKE SW
The brake pedal was depressed.
DIS: P/N SW
A gear shift change was detected.
DIS: N/V
The ratio of engine RPM and vehicle speed was not within proper limits for S/C operation.
DIS: CLUTCH
A clutch engagement was detected.
DIS: DTC
A fault in the cruise control logic was detected.
DIS: S/C SW
S/C disabled by speed control switch.
DIS: CAN SW
S/C disabled by cancel switch.
DIS: THROT
S/C disabled by throttle limp-in.
ENG: NO ENG
S/C system is enabled but not engaged.
ENG: NORMAL
S/C system is in Cruise mode.
ENG: ACCEL
S/C system is in Accelerate mode.
ENG: DECEL
S/C system is in Decelerate mode
SHIFT SOLENOID 1
STATES ON/OFF
Shift Solenoid 1 tells the state of shift solenoid 1 in the transmission.
SHIFT SOLENOID 2 STATES ON/OFF
Shift Solenoid 2 tells the state of shift solenoid 2 in the transmission.
SHIFT SOLENOID 3 STATES ON/OFF
Shift Solenoid 3 tells the state of shift solenoid 3 in the transmission.
SHIFT SOLENOID 4 STATES ON/OFF
Shift Solenoid 4 tells the state of shift solenoid 4 in the transmission.
SHORT RUNNER VALVE SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The SRV SOLENOID is controlled by the PCM and when energized, the solenoid allows mechanical linkage to redirect the intake air flow to six short runners. The SRV system operates under WOT conditions above 5000 RPM to maximize engine performance.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 223
Engine System Parameters
C. Data List Parameter Description
SHORT TERM ADAPTIVE
UNITS
RANGE
%
+50/-50
Indicates the percentage of adjustment made by the PCM to the fuel pulse width. Short Term Adaptive relates to the immediate fuel adjustment made for current driving condition and therefore change at a faster rate than the Long Term Adaptive parameter.
SPARK ADVANCE
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREE
0 – 127
If the engine is star ted when cold, the EEC advances the spark based on coolant temperature, engine speed, and engine vacuum. Once the engine is warm, spark advance is determined by vacuum and RPM. W hen the closed throttle switch is closed, the amount of advance relative to engine vacuum is eliminated.
SPARK FUEL LIMIT
STATES ON/OFF
This parameter indicates the status of the spark and/or fuel shut-off during an upshift or downshift for torque management.
S/C ON/OFF SWITCH
STATES HIGH/LOW
This parameter indicates the status of the speed control On/Off switch.
S/C RESUME SWITCH
STATES HIGH/LOW
This parameter indicates the status of the speed control RESUME switch.
S/C SET SWITCH
STATES HIGH/LOW
This parameter indicates the status of the speed control SET switch.
S/C VACUUM SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The speed control solenoid increases vacuum as required during speed control operation.
S/C VENT SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The speed control vent solenoid reduces vacuum as required during speed control operation.
STARTER ENGAGED
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
An input signal to notify the EEC that the starter is currently engaged.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 224
Engine System Parameters
TARGET IDLE
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
RPM
0 – 9999
Target Idle is the EEC calculated engine idle speed that the EEC is trying to achieve (or target). This value is updated every ignition key cycle.
TCC SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
This solenoid is used for t orque convertor engagement. The EEC determines w hen to engage and disengage the solenoid by monitoring various inputs.
THEFT STATUS
STATES FUEL ON/FUEL OFF
This parameter indicates the status of the vehicle theft alarm operation whether fuel is being allowed by the T/A module or not.
THEORY GOV PRESS
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 127
This is the target governor pressure. It is a function of the output speed shaft.
TFT LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
By use of the transmission temperature sensor, the EEC uses this lamp to warn of a possible transmission fluid overheating condition.
TFT (V)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
The temperature data is used to monitor transmission fluid temperature and used in the shift operation for the transmission.
THROTTLE BODY TEMPERATURE AND SENSOR VOLTAGE
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
DEGREES C
-40 – 127
DEGREES F
-40 – 261
Single-Point fuel-injection models changed from a charge temperature sensor to a throttle body temperature sensor in order to measure the fuel temperature in the throttl e body. Read when the key is in Key On/Engine Off position, the information is used to determine air/fuel mixture during hot restarts. In order to avoid vapor lock, the higher the throttle body temperature, the wider the injector pulse width and the lower the sensor voltage.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 225
Engine System Parameters
TPS (V)
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
The TPS relays the throttle position to the EEC via a r otary potentiometer mounted on the throttl e shaft. The voltage range is approximately 1 volt at idle to > 4 volts at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The throttle position influences the determination of the correct air /fuel mixture.
TPS (%)
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
Throttle Position Sensor Opening indicates the relative throttle position in relation to the stored minimum throttle.
TOTAL KNOCK RETARD
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This parameter displays the total amount the spark advance is retarded due to detonation.
TOTAL KNOCK RETARD SENSOR
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
On 1984 Turbo models, the total amount that the ignition timing can be retarded when a knock condition is detected.
TOTAL SPARK ADV.
UNITS
RANGE
°s BTDC
0 – 134
The Total Spark Advance equals the sum of the electrical spark advance supplied by the controller plus the specified mechanical spark advance.
TRANS POWER RLY
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The output to this relay provides battery voltage to OD, TCC, VSS solenoids.
TRANSDUCE OFFSET
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
The EEC calculated governor pressure when the output shaft speed is greater than 200 rpm to compensate for barometric pressure.
TRUCK INJECTOR BANK #1 & #2 BASE PULSE WIDTH
UNITS
RANGE
mSEC
0 – 131
The fuel-injection system used on 1988-94 model trucks is a throttle body fuel-injection system that utilizes two injectors; one for each side of the engine. The pulse width (ON time) of each injector can be displayed in milliseconds.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 226
Engine System Parameters
VAC (kPa, IN. HG)
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
kPa
0 – 101
in. Hg
0 – 30
Engine vacuum is determined by the EEC by subtracting the MAP reading from the BARO reading.
VEHICLE SPEED
UNITS
RANGE
MPH/KPH
0 – 999
The speed sensor allows the EEC to know if the vehicle is changing speed or standing at idle with the throttle closed. The EEC uses vehicle speed to make determinations about the operation of various engine management and speed control components.
VNT-1 & VNT-2 DUTY CYCLE (TURBO IV)
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The Variable Variable Nozzle Turbocharger on Turbo IV engines is a ring of vanes that are opened to decrease turbo pressure and closed to increase turbo pressure by the VNT-1 and VNT-2 VNT-2 Solenoids. The VNT Duty Cycle displays the percentage that the VNT-1 VNT-1 and VNT-2 solenoid are being commanded on.
VNT-1 SOLENOID (TURBO IV ONLY)
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The VNT-1 VNT-1 Solenoid output is de-energized during idle conditi ons and energized during WOT accelerations. The solenoid switches between energized and de-energized during varying part throttle conditions and decelerations.
VNT-2 SOLENOID (TURBO IV ONLY)
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The VNT-2 VNT-2 solenoid output i s energized at a controlled duty cycle only during engine conditions in the region of a vacuum/boost transition. The solenoid switches between energized and de-energized states based on engine temperature, MAP value, throttle position, and rates of acceleration.
VNT-3 SOLENOID (TURBO IV ONLY)
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The VNT-3 VNT-3 solenoid output is energized at a controlled duty cycle to reduce pressure applied to the turbocharger wastegate actuator.
WAIT/START LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
The Wait-To-Start Wait-To-Start lamp is tur ned ON and OFF by the EEC based on the intake manifold air temperature sensor input.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 227
Engine System Parameters
WASTEGATE DUTY CYCLE
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
% ON
0 – 100
This parameter is only available for vehicles with Turbo I engines. The wastegate prevents the engine from developing dangerously high manifold pressure (overboost) which could damage the engine. The Wastegate Duty Cycle parameter indicates the percentage at which the duty cycle is being commanded to operate.
WASTEGATE SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
To protect the engine, the wastegate solenoid vents the line to the wastegate actuator during periods of excess Turbo boost.
WATER IN FUEL
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
This parameter indicates the presence of water in the fuel system. The higher the voltage displayed, the higher the water content.
WATER/FUEL LAMP
STATES ON/OFF
The EEC turns the Water-N-Fuel indicator lamp to the ON position if water is detected in the fuel.
Z1 & Z2 VOLTAGE SENSE
STATES HIGH/LOW
Input to engine computer from fuel supply and ASD systems. The input is HIGH when the auto shutdown relay is energized.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 228
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS (EATX) 1-2 RANGE SWITCH
STATES ON/OFF
1-2 Range SW indicates the state of the 1st and 2nd gear range switch.
2-4 CVI
RANGE 0 – 255
2-4 CVI indicates the relative fluid volume required to apply the 2-4 Clutch element to a point where the clutch pack has zero clearance. The normal range for the 2-4 CVI can be seen in the CVI monitor mode.
2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
One of three pressure switches used by the EATX controller to monitor fluid pressure and check for the correct gear states. The correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the back of this section.
2C CVI
RANGE 0 – 255
2C CVI indicates the relative fluid volume required to apply the 2C Clutch element to a point where the clutch pack has zero clearance. The normal range for the 2C clutch is 25-85.
2C PRESSURE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
One of five pressure switches used by the EATX controller to monitor fluid pressure and check for the correct gear states. The correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the back of this section.
3 RANGE SWITCH
STATES ON/OFF
3 Range SW indicates the state of the 3rd gear range switch.
4C CVI
RANGE 0 – 255
4C CVI indicates the relative fluid volume required to apply the 4C Clutch element to a point where the clutch pack has zero clearance. The normal range for the 4C clutch is 30-85.
4C PRESSURE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
One of five pressure switches used by the EATX controller to monitor fluid pressure and check for the correct gear states. The correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the back of this section.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 229
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
ACTUAL GEAR
STATES NEUTRAL/REVERSE/FIRST GEAR/ SECOND GEAR/ALT. SECOND/ THIRD GEAR/FOURTH GEAR
Actual Gear indicates the gear the transmission is currently in.
APPLIED GEAR
STATES NEUTRAL/REVERSE/FIRST GEAR/ SECOND GEAR/ALT. SECOND/ THIRD GEAR/FOURTH GEAR
Applied Gear indicates which gear the transmission is going to shift into or the one it is currently in.
AUTOSTICK (A/S) DOWNSHIFT SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
Autostick Downshift Switch indicates the state of the switch. When there is no shift activity, the switch should be in an open state.
AUTOSTICK (A/S) GEAR POSITION
STATES FIRST/SECOND/THIRD/ FOURTH/NO DISPLAY
Autostick Gear Position indicates the gear position while in Autostick mode. When the vehicle is not in Autostick mode, the parameter should indicate so with the state No Display.
AUTOSTICK (A/S) UPSHIFT SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
Autostick Upshift Switch i ndicates the state of the switch. When t here is no shift activity, the switch should be in an open state.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 25V
Battery Voltage Voltage is a signal r ead from the EEC and relayed to the AW4 controller.
BREAK-IN MILEAGE
UNITS
RANGE
MILES
0 – 58,600
Break-In Mileage displays the mileage.
BREAK-IN STATUS
STATES IN PROGRESS/COMPLETE
Break-In Status displays the status of the current torque converter clutch break-in procedure as either In Progress or Complete. Status should be In Progress if the torque converter has less than 3750 miles and less than 360 minutes of P-EMCC.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 230
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
C5
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
C5 indicates the open/closed state of the switch. The correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the back of this section.
CURRENT GEAR
STATES NEUTRAL/REVERSE FIRST/SECOND/THIRD/FOURTH
Current Gear displays which gear the transmission is currently in.
DESIRED LINE PRESSURE
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 255
The TCM compares the Desired Line Pressure with the Actual Line Pressure and sets a DTC if there is a difference of 10 psi or more.
ENGINE SPEED
UNITS
RANGE
RPM
0 – 9999
The Engine Speed is determined from the distributor reference pulses. The EATX controller receives this information from the EEC via the CCD Bus.
J2 VOLTS IGNITION FEED
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 25V
Ignition Feed (J2 voltage) indicates the voltage supply to the EATX controller memory from the vehicle battery.
LAST SHIFT
STATES 1ST TO 3RD/2ND TO 3RD/ 3RD TO 4TH/2ND TO 4TH/ 3RD TO 2ND/3RD TO 1ST/ 2ND TO 1ST/4TH TO 3RD/ 4TH TO 2ND/NEUT TO 1ST/ NEUT TO REV/REV TO NEUT
Last Shift indicates the transmission’s last shift or current shift that is in progress.
LIMP-IN STATUS
STATES NORMAL/LIMPING IN
Limp-in Status indicates the current EATX operation mode. If Limp-in Status is Limping In, then transmission operation is limited to park, reverse, neutral, and second gear.
LINE PRESSURE
UNITS
RANGE
PSI
0 – 255
The TCM compares the Desired Line Pressure with the Actual Line Pressure and sets a DTC if there is a difference of 10 psi or more.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 231
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
LINE PRESSURE (V)
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
Line Pressure is the voltage at the Line Pressure Sensor that is a direct input to the TCM.
LR CVI
RANGE 0 – 255
Low Reverse CVI indicates the relative fluid volume required to apply th e Low Reverse Clutch element to a point where the clutch pack has zero clearance. The normal range for the LR CVI can be seen in the CVI monitor mode.
LR PRESSURE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
One of three pressure switches used by the EATX controller to monitor fluid pressure and check f or correct gear states. Correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
MINIMUM TPS
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES
0 – 100%
VOLTS
0 – 5V
Minimum Throttle is a value that the EEC uses for automatic zero positioning.
OD CVI
RANGE 0 – 255
Overdrive CVI indicates the relative fluid volume required to apply the Overdrive Clutch element to a point where the clutch pack has zero clearance. The norm al range for the OD CVI can be seen in the CVI monitor mode.
OD LOCKOUT SWITCH
STATES OD ON/OD OFF
The O/D Lockout Switch can be toggled on or off by the user. The switch must be OD On to allow a 3-4 upshift. If the switch is off, the indicator lamp is illuminated.
OD PRESSURE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
One of three pressure switches used by the EATX controller to monitor fluid pressure and check f or correct gear states. Correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
OD RANGE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
One of three pressure switches used by the EATX controller to monitor fluid pressure and check f or correct gear states. Correct state of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 232
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
OUTPUT SPEED
C. Data List Parameter Description
UNITS
RANGE
RPM
0 – 9999
The Output Shaft Speed i s a direct input to the EATX controller. The Output Speed i s determined from the Output Speed Sensor reference pulses.
OVERDRIVE OVERRIDE
STATES HIGH/LOW
This parameter shows the state of the Overdrive Override switch. When the state is High, the transmission is not allowed to shift into overdrive.
OVERDRIVE SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The Overdrive Solenoid controls the overdrive on or off.
PARK/NEUTRAL
STATES PARK/REVERSE/NEUTRAL OVERDRIVE/DRIVE/LOW
Park/Neutral displays the transmission gear based on the state of the park/neutral switch.
PCS DUTY CYCLE
UNITS
RANGE
%
0 – 100
The Pressure Control Solenoid Duty Cycle is controlled by the TCM and vents unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump.
PINION FACTOR Pinion Factor is displayed as the tire size that is being used by the EATX controller to calculate the vehicle’s speed and mileage. The factor is stored i n the Transmission Control Module and can only be changed using the Pinion Factor Reprogramming mode. When reading a Pinion Factor, a tire size is displayed if the tire size is within a specified range or the tire change has been programmed into the controller by the Manufacturer’s scantool. If the current pinion factor is valid but does not fall within a specified tire size range recognized by Vetronix Corporation, the tester notifies you that the Pinion Factor is valid.
PRESSURE SWITCH DATA
STATES REVERSE/NEUTRAL FIRST/SECOND/THIRD/FOURTH
Pressure Switch Data displays the transmission gear based on the state of the pressure switches.
PRESSURE SWITCH ERROR
RANGE 0 – 255
Pressure Switch Error counter is a buffer that stores the amount of pressure switch errors that occur. This is updated during normal operation and not during shifts, and gives an indication to the EATX controller logic that solenoid power should be increased or decreased.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 233
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
PTU SOLENOID
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
The PTU solenoid controls the Part Throttle Unlock system.
R RANGE SWITCH
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
R Range SW indicates the state of the reverse gear range switch.
RL1-REV LAMP SWITCH C1 C1 (T41/NS1)
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
C1 indicates the open/closed state of the switch. Correct states of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
RL2-REV LAMP SWITCH C2 C2 (T42/NS2)
STATES OPEN/CLOSED
C2 indicates the open/closed state of the switch. Correct states of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
RL1-REVERSE LAMP C3 C3 (T3/RL1)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 25V
C3 indicates the open/closed state of the switch. Correct states of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
RL2-REVERSE LAMP C4 C4 (T1/RL2)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 25V
C4 indicates the open/closed state of the switch. Correct states of the switch can be checked with the table listed at the end of this section.
SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP
STATES ENERGIZED/DE-ENERGIZED
On certain manual transmission models, the shift indicator lamp indicates the optimum gear shifting conditions.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 234
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
SHIFT LEVER POSITION
STATES PARK/REVERSE/NEUTRAL OVERSRIVE/DRIVE/LOW
Shift Lever Position is determined by EATX controller using a combination of switch states. If the actual shift lever position does not match the tester displayed position, the different switch states can be monitored individually to determine the error.
SHIFT SCHEDULE
STATES NEUTRAL/REVERSE/ FIRST GEAR/SECOND GEAR/ THIRD GEAR/FOURTH GEAR
The transmission Shift Schedule informs you which gear the transmission is going to shift into or the gear that it is currently in.
SPD/RAT 1S TIMER
RANGE 0 – 255
Speed Ratio 1 Second Timer is a buffer that stores the amount of speed/ratio gear errors that occur in 1 second. Speed/ratio errors are an indication of Turbine to Output Shaft RPM not comparing to current gear ratio.
SPD/RAT 15S TIMER
RANGE 0 – 255
Speed Ratio 15 Second Timer is a buffer that stores the amount of speed/ratio gear errors that occur in 15 seconds. Speed/ratio errors are an indication of Turbine to Output Shaft RPM not comparing to current gear ratio.
SPEED/RATIO ERR
RANGE 0 – 255
Speed Ratio Error counter is a buffer that stores the amount of speed/ratio errors that occur. This is updated during normal operation and not during shifts.
SWITCHED BATTERY
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 25V
Switched Battery voltage indicates the voltage supply to the EATX controller from the ignition switch.
TCC FULL LOCK
STATES YES/NO
Torque Converter Clutch Full Lock displays whether or not the torque converter is fully locked or engaged.
TCC LOCK-UP
STATES NO EMCC/ PARTIAL EMCC/FULL EMCC
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up displays the state of Electronic Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) application.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 235
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
TCC P-EMCC
STATES YES/NO
Torque Converter Clutch Partial Electronic Modulated Converter Clutch displays whether or not the torque converter is partially engaged.
TCC UNLOCK
STATES YES/NO
Torque Converter Clutch Unlock displays whether or not the torque converter is unlocked or not engaged.
THROTTLE ANGLE
UNITS
RANGE
DEGREES
0 – 100%
The Throttle Angle is determined from the throttle position sensor voltage. The EATX controller receives this information from the EEC via the CCD Bus.
TIME IN P-EMCC
UNITS
RANGE
MINUTES
0 – 489
Time in Partial EMCC is used to monitor the progress of the Torque Converter Clutch Break-In procedure. The Break-In procedure should be complete after 360 minutes of P-EMCC.
TPS(V)
UNITS
RANGE
VOLTS
0 – 5V
The TPS relays the throttle position to the AW4 controller. Input from this sensor and others determine the shift schedule and converter clutch engagement time.
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
UNITS
RANGE
°F
+512°/-512°
Transmission Temperature is the tr ansmission fluid temperature predicted by the EATX controller.
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE STATE
STATES HOT/WARM/COLD/ SUPER COLD/ EXTREME COLD
Transmission Temperature State displays the temperature condition of the tr ansmission. (Note: This parameter is valid only with the engine running.)
TURBINE SPEED INPUT RPM
UNITS
RANGE
RPM
0 – 9999
The Turbine (Input) Speed is a direct input to the EATX controller. The Turbine Speed is determined fr om the Turbine Speed Sensor reference pulses.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 236
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
UD CVI
RANGE 0 – 255
Underdrive CVI indicates the relative fluid volume required to apply the Underdrive Clutch element to a point where the clutch pack has zero clearance. The normal range for the Underdrive clutch can be seen in the CVI monitor mode.
NORMAL PRESSURE SWITCH STATE CHARTS The EATX transmission monitors t he fluid pressure using three pressure switches. Below are the normal pressure switch states of the LR Pressure S/W, 2-4 Pressure S/W, and OD Pressure S/W.
GEAR
LR
2-4
OD
P
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
R
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
N
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
1
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
2
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
3
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
4
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
The TCM for the 45RFE monitors the fluid pressure using five different pressure switches in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The TCM continuously monitors the switches for the correct states shown in the following chart:
GEAR
L/R
2C
4C
UD
OD
R
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
P/N
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
1ST
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
2ND
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
2ND Prime
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
D
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
OD
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN = Switch is open (No Pressure) CLOSED = Switch is closed (Pressure Indicated)
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 237
Transmission Parameters (EATX)
C. Data List Parameter Description
Shift lever status is determined by a combination of 4 transmission switches (C1,C2,C3,C4). The chart below can be used to verify that the shift lever positi on status indicated by the transmission control module corresponds to the actual shift lever position.
PRNODL LEVER POSITION
41TE & 42LE ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSIONS C1
C2
C3
C4
P
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
R
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
N
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OD
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
D
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
L
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
Shift lever status is determined by a combination of 5 transmission switches (C1,C2,C3,C4, C5). The chart below can be used to verify that the shift lever positi on status indicated by the transmission control module corresponds to the actual shift lever position.
PRNODL LEVER POSITION
45RFE ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
P
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
R
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
N
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
D
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
2
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
L
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 238
D. CHRYSLER CONTROLLERS AND DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES
WHAT IS ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS, PHASE II (OBD II)? The California Air Resource Board (CARB) has required that by 1996, “all vehicles sold in California contain a certain minimum On Board Diagnostic” capability to diagnose emissions related failures of the engine control system. These diagnostic requirements have been designated as OBD II (On Board Diagnostics, Phase II) with a goal of monitoring “all of the emissions-related components on-board the vehicle for proper operation.” CARB’s intent with the OBD II program is to “permit the State’s Inspection and Maintenance Program to evolve into a check of the on-board computer for the presence of diagnostic trouble codes; underhood and tailpipe inspections would no longer be required.” Part of the OBD II program is for the vehicle to provide a standard interface for off-board diagnostic test equipment. This standard interface includes a standard test connector (referred to as the J1962 16-pin data link connector), a standard communicati on protocol (SAE J1850 PWM, SAE J1850 VPW, ISO 9141-2, ISO 14230-4, and ISO 15765-4) and a standard set of diagnostic test modes/services (SAE J1979, ISO 15031-5). The intention of CARB’s OBD II program was that a single diagnostic tester could be used to read the diagnostic information from any OBD II compliant vehicle. A tester which satisfies this requirement can be designated as an OBD II Scan Tool and is defined by the SAE document J1978. One of the requirements of the OBD II Scan Tool is that it has to work with any OBD II compliant vehicle and that it must be able to automatically determine all information required to communicate with the vehicle. The operator cannot be required to enter such vehicle specific information as the vehicle manufacturer, model year, or engine. The OBD II Scan Tool must determine what protocol the vehicle uses, what diagnostic parameters can be read from the vehicle, and what tests are supported by the vehicle. When used with Generic OBD II software, the Tech 1, Tech 1A, and MTS 3100 testers support the basic requirements of the SAE’s J1978 document including automatic determination of vehicle protocol and data parameters, display of Current Diagnostic Data Parameters, display of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), display of Freeze Frame Data captured by the vehicle PCM along with a DTC, clear DTCs and Freeze Frame Data from the on-board controller’s memory, display results of various on-board monitoring tests (e.g., oxygen sensor tests), and the capability to expand diagnostic capabilities via the standard Expanded Diagnostic Protocol.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 239
Why Advanced Vehicle Electronics?
D. Chrysler Controllers and Diagnostic Procedures
In addition to these required OBD II Scan Tool functions, the Tech 1, Tech 1A, and MTS 3100 testers provide a number of enhancements to the OBD II diagnostic functions, i ncluding road test support through the capture of sequences of data parameters (Snapshot), user selectable parameter list allowing the user to trade-off update rate for amount of data, plot of data parameters (MTS 3100 only), and print a hardcopy of data parameters.
WHY ADVANCED VEHICLE ELECTRONICS? In order for car manufactures to meet increasingly stringent federal standards for fuel economy and emissions control, a dynamic on-board computer capable of optimizing the air/fuel ratio under various engine conditions became necessary. Chrysler began with a simple oxygen feedback system, which has evolved so that it now controls all input and output systems related to fuel economy and emissions. Selfdiagnosis and diagnostic test procedures have been included in the Electronic Engine Controller (EEC) to utilize fault codes for troubleshooting various electronic engine systems. SENSORS
CONTROLS
EEC
IDLE SPEED FUEL INJECTOR(S) ELECTRONIC SPARK A/C CLUTCH FAN SOLENOID
INTERNAL PARAMETERS
DAT
ADDED ADAPTIVE FUEL ADAPTIVE FUEL MULTIPLIER DESIRED ENGINE IDLE KNOCK RETARD INJECTOR PULSEWIDTH SPARK ADVANCE
VEHICLE SPEED CHARGE TEMP BATTERY VOLTAGE COOLANT TEMP. THROTTLE POSITION OXYGEN MAP
SWITCHES PARK/NEUTRAL A/C SWITCH BRAKE
CONTROL SIGNALS
tech 1 GM
TECH 1
NOTE: DATA PARAMETERS SHOWN ARE FOR TYPICAL FUEL INJECTED ENGINE.
Major changes in Chrysler’s electronic engine control strategy were implemented in 1989. Besides offering faster testing and automatic engine selection, the new system includes several new special tests. The Chrysler 1983-2004 Powertrain Application can test the 1983-1988 engine control systems as well as the modern 1989-2004 Powertrain systems.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 240
What is the Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Data Link?
D. Chrysler Controllers and Diagnostic Procedures
EECs
CARB
EFI
TBI
MFI
TURBO
The Electronic Engine Controllers are distinguished by the fuel intake system. CARB
Feedback Carbureted (FBC) fuel intake systems.
EFI
Electronic Fuel Injection. Covers all fuel injection systems.
MFI
Multi-point Fuel Injection. A multiple injector system designed to distribute the fuel more evenly to the cylinders.
TBI
Throttle Body Injection. One or two injectors mounted on a throttle body on top of the intake manifold.
TURBO
Turbocharger option on EFI engines.
WHAT IS THE SERIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE (SCI) DATA LINK? The Serial Communication Interface (SCI) link is an electronic transmit and receive communication protocol with one circuit dedicated for data t ransmission and another separate circuit dedicated for data receive. The term link refers to an electrical wire connection between a vehicle electronic controller (SMEC, SBEC I, II, III, etc.) and a diagnostic tester that are linked together to enable communication. Using the tester as a point of reference, this communication is a series of messages, one followed by the other (serial communication), that are sent from the vehicle controller to the tester (receive), or from the tester (transmit) to the vehicle controller. How does this play a role in vehicle system diagnostics? Using the SCI, a diagnostic tester can ask the vehicle electronic powertrain system controller for diagnostic information or request diagnostic modes. Diagnostic information contains diagnostic data parameters and diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), while diagnostic command messages are used to command the vehicle controller to operate an actuator (e.g., AIS motor or ASD relay). Either way, the result is the display of data list parameters and DTCs, or the actuation of a particular output device. It is also important to note that while some 1995 and all 1996 and newer Chrysler vehicles are OBD II compliant, they still support the SCI. Using SCI enables the diagnostic tester to ask for more diagnostic data from the vehicle electronic powertrain system controller than what can be obtained or displayed from the SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5 OBD II diagnostic test modes (some automotive manufacturers support enhanced OBD II data which also achieves the same result of displaying more diagnostic data parameters). So, having the support for SCI gives you more diagnostic information and a diagnostic solution can be achieved faster and with better results.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 241
What Is the CCD Data Link?
D. Chrysler Controllers and Diagnostic Procedures
WHAT IS THE CCD DATA LINK? The Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) bus is an electronic two-wire data bus designed to send digital messages from one electronic controller to another (the t erm bus refers to a electrical wire l ink that connects to several electronic controllers, on which information is carried and shared). Each controller has a device identification assigned to it that other controllers use to know who is sending information. The CCD data bus is kind of like a telephone party line which has several listeners but one t alker. There can be only one controller asserting data on the CCD bus, while the other controllers receive data. Examples are a powertrain controller information that can be sent to the EATX controller, or a body controller that sends information to an electronic instrument cluster. In both cases, all controllers are attached to the CCD bus, but there can be one talker on the bus at a time. How does this play a role in vehicle system diagnostics? The CCD bus offers more than intercommunications between controllers. It facilitates the diagnostics of several vehicle systems through the CCD connector. Your diagnostic tester has the capability to control the CCD bus and become the bus master. When you connect to the CCD bus, the tester automatically identifies the members on the bus. The tester software displays the necessary action for you to perform. You need to know that the CCD bus is a method or pathway for vehicle controllers to share information, from which you can use your tester to read this data and increase your vehicle system diagnostic capability. Spend some time reviewing this and other service manuals that explain more about the CCD bus. Doing so speeds up your diagnostic productivity and increases your knowledge of vehicle electronics. Use of the CCD protocol by engine, tr ansmission, chassis, and body system ECUs applies to MY 1988-2002 Chrysler vehicles.
WHAT IS THE SAE J1850 DATA LINK? The SAE J1850 data link is a single wire that communicates electronic signals from one device to another using Variable Pulse Width (VPW). The Chrysler J1850 Electronic Control Unit (ECU) uses the SAE J1850 data link to share information with other electronic control modules and diagnostic testers. The Chrysler 10.4K bits/second protocol is SAE J1850 compliant and is used to m eet the On-Board Diagnostics version II requirements. Examples of SAE J1850 VPW ECUs that Vetronix utilizes for diagnostic purposes are Transmission Control Modules (TCMs), Anti-Lock Brake System Control Modules (ABS), and Body Control Modules (BCMs). Each device has an identification code assigned to it that other ECUs can uniquely identify.
OBD II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION OBD II compliant engine management systems use a new naming convention for Oxygen Sensors (O2S). The need for this sensor convention w as required because of the OBD I I system’s use of a downstream O2S. O2S location information is divided into cylinder bank and O2S location. Bank 1 contains the sensor that is downstream from the engine cylinder bank which has number 1 cylinder. Bank 2 contains the sensor opposite the cylinder Bank 1. Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 242
OBD II Oxygen Sensor Location Information
D. Chrysler Controllers and Diagnostic Procedures
Additionally, O2S location is separated into upstream and downstream, relative to the catalytic converter. For inline engines and V-configuration engines with Wye exhaust systems and one O2S ahead of the catalytic converter, O2S 1 is the upstream sensor and O2S 2 is the downstream sensor. This results in the naming convention bank/location. Examples are:
O2S 1/1=bank 1, upstream O2S 1/2=bank 1, downstream
O2 Sensor 1/1
O2 Sensor 1/1
O2 Sensor 1/2
O2 Sensor 1/2
For V-configuration engines and inline engines with dual exhaust systems, there may be separate upstream and downstream O2S for each bank. This results in the following naming convention:
O2S 1/1=bank 1, upstream O2S 1/2=bank 1, downstream O2 Sensor 1/1
O2S 2/1=bank 2, upstream
O2 Sensor 1/1
O2 Sensor 2/1
O2 Sensor 1/2 O2 Sensor 2/1
O2S 2/2=bank 2, downstream
O2 Sensor 2/2 O2 Sensor 1/2
O2 Sensor 2/2
On some V-configuration engines with 2 upstream O2S, there may be an O2S 3. O2S 3 is the downstream O2S after the catalytic converter. This configuration may have a third O2S ahead of the catalytic converter, and results in the following naming convention:
O2S 1/1=bank 1, upstream O2S 1/2=bank 1, upstream O2S 2/1=bank 2, upstream O2S 1/3=bank 1, downstream
O2 Sensor 1/1
O2 Sensor 2/1
O2 Sensor 1/2
O2 Sensor 1/3
Together, these conventions are all used to identify the O2S that may be causing a DTC or producing a faulty signal. The O2S naming conventions shown here are consistent with J1979. Please consult the appropriate service manual for more information on the vehicle that you are working on.
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 243
E. GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS
This appendix contains terms and abbreviations found in the Chrysler chassis, powertrain, and body systems manuals.
#1
Fuel Injector Bank #1
#2
Fuel Injector Bank #2
#3
Fuel Injector Bank #3
3ATX
3 Speed Automatic Transaxle
4xRE
4 Speed Electronically Controlled Automatic Transmission
ATC
Automatic Temperature Control
ATCM
Automatic Temperature Control Module
ATM
Actuator Test Mode
AUTO
Automatic Transmission
BAR
Barometric Read Solenoid
BARO
Barometer, Barometric
A/C
Air Conditioner, A/C Clutch Relay
BATT
Battery
A/S
Autostick
BBL
Barrel
AAT
Ambient Air Temperature
BCM
Body Control Module
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
BK
Brake
ACT
Actuator
BUX
Built Up Export
ADAPT
Adaptive
CAB
Controller Anti-lock Brake
ADV
Advance
CALIF
California Emissions Package
AIR
Air Switch Solenoid
CAN
Cancel
AIS
Automatic Idle Speed
CAN
Controller Area Network
ALDL
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
CARB
Carburetor
ALL
All Solenoids/Outputs
C/C
Cam/Crank
ALT
Alternator, Alternator Field
CCD
Chrysler Collision Detection databus
APM
Adjustable Pedals Module
CCP
Canister Purge Solenoid
APPS
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
CDR
Chrysler Diagnostic Readout
ASD
Automatic Shutdown
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 244
E. Glossary and Abbreviations
CHG
Charge
FBC
Feedback Carburetor
CHK
Check
FCM
Front Control Module
CKT
Circuit
FDBK
FeedBack
CMTC
Compass/Mini-Trip Computer
FF
Flexible Fuel
CNTRL
Control
FI
Fuel Injection
CONTRL
Control
FMS
Fuel Monitor Signal
CTM
Central Timer Module
GND
Ground
CURR
Current
HD
Heavy Duty
CVI
Clutch Volume Index
HDC
Heavy Duty Chassis
DBL
Double
Hg
Mercury
DC
Duty Cycle
Hi
High
DDM
Driver Door Module
HP
High Pressure
Des
Desired
IAC
Intake Air Control
DI
Distributor Ignition
IAT
Intake Air Temperature
DIS
Direct Ignition System
ID
Identifier
DISCONN
Disconnect
IGC
Ignition Coil
DLC
Data Link Connector
IGN
Ignition
DMP
Dump
IJ
Injector
DTC
Diagnostic Trouble Code
IN
Inches
EATX
Electronic Automatic Transmission
INFO
Information
EBD
Electronic Brake Distribution
INJ
Injector
ECT
Engine Coolant Temperature
IOD
Ignition-Off Draw
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
IPM
Integrated Power Module
EEC
Electronic Engine Controller
ISO
Isolation
EFI
Electronic Fuel Injection
IVS
Idle Valid Signal
EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
KOEO
Key On, Engine Off
EI
Electronic (Distributorless) Ignition
KOER
Key On, Engine Running
ELEC
Electrical
kPa
Kilo Pascal (Units)
ELECTRIC
Electrical
KS
Knock Sensor
EMCC
Electronic Modulated Converter Clutch
LD
Light Duty
LDC
Light Duty Chassis
LDP
Leak Detection Pump
LF
Left Front
LP
Low Pressure or Lamp
EMR
Emission Maintenance Reminder
ENERGZD
Energized
ETC
Electronic Throttle Control
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 245
E. Glossary and Abbreviations
LR
Low Reverse, Left Rear
LT
Light/Lamp
MAP
Manifold Absolute Pressure
MFI
Multi-Port Fuel Injection
MIC
Mechanical Instrument Cluster
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Light
MIN
Minimum
MISC
Miscellaneous
Mon
Monitor
MPI
Multiport Fuel Injection
MPU
Microprocessor Unit
MS
Multi-Select
MSC
Mass Storage Cartridge
MSM
Memory Seat Module
MVT
Manifold Tune Valve
MTX
Manual Transmission
N
Number
N/A
Not Available
N/V
Engine RPM/Vehicle Speed
NGC
Next Generation Controller
NVLD
Natural Vacuum Leak Detection
NVRAM
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
P-EMCC
Partial Electronic Modulated Converted Clutch
PCM
Powertrain Control Module
PCS
Pressure Control Solenoid
PDM
Passenger Door Module
Pos or Posit
Position
PRESS
Pressure
PSI
Pounds of Pressure per Square Inch
PTU
Part Throttle Unlock
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation
RAM
Random Access Memory
REF
Reference
RF
Right Front
RKE
Remote Keyless Entry
RL
Relay
RLY
Relay
ROM
Read Only Memory
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
RR
Right Rear
RWAL
Rear Wheel Anti-lock Brake
S/C
Speed Control
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers
SBEC
Single Board Engine Controller
O2
Oxygen
SCI
Serial Communication Interface
O2S
Oxygen Sensor
SENS
Sensor
OBD II
On Board Diagnostics, Phase II
SHF
Shift Lamp
OD
Overdrive
SHUTDN
Shutdown
ORC
Occupant Restraint Controller
SKIM
Sentry Key Immobilizer Module
OVD
Overdrive
SMEC
Single Module Electronic Controller
Ovride
Override
SNSR
Sensor
P/N
Park/Neutral
SOL
Solenoid
P/S
Power Steering
SPD
Speed
P/W
Pulse Width
SPK
Spark
SRV
Short Runner Valve
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 246
E. Glossary and Abbreviations
STEP
Stepper
WGT
Wastegate
SV
Special Valve
WOT
Wide Open Throttle
SW
Switch
WST
Wastegate
SYNC
Synchronous
SYS
System
T/B
Throttle Body
T-BODY
Throttle Body
TAC
Tachometer
TACH
Tachometer
TBI
Throttle Body Fuel Injection
TC
Traction Control
TCC
Torque Converter Clutch
TCM
Transmission Control Module
THROT
Throttle
TEMP
Temperature
TRAN
Transmission
TRANSM
Transmission
TRIG
Trigger
TP
Temperature
TPS
Throttle Position Sensor
TURBO
Turbocharger
UD
Underdrive
VAC
Vacuum
VIC
Vehicle Ignition Controller
VIM
Vehicle Interface Module. An in-line interface that expands tester functionality.
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VLV
Valve
VNT
Variable Nozzle Turbocharger
VOS
Vacuum Operated Secondary
VPW
Variable Pulse Width
VTA
Vehicle Theft Alarm
VTSS
Vehicle Theft Security System
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
Page 247
INDEX
Numerics 1 trip fail 103 1989 Turbo II 56
A
custom data list 79 CVI monitor 148
D
A/T outputs 141 actuator test 89, 115 adapter cable 58 guide 58 adaptive fuel 120 AIS counter 120 ASD fuel system test 123
data list 77 data pairs 79 data parameters 78 door locks 120 DTC review 91 DTCs Aisin AW4 204 EATX 198 engine 174 models 1998 and later 191
B
E
barometer update 135 bars on screen 170 base timing 131 blank screen 169
EGR test 129 EMR lamp reset 133 engine identification 53 engine running tests (CDR) 93 engine systems parameters 206 engine type selection 54
C cam/crank 120 cartridge malfunctioning 170 cartridge missing 170 CDR mode 81 Chrysler VIN 72 cigarette lighter polarity 4 clear DTCs (CDR) 97 clear information 104 connect DLC 6
Chrysler Powertrain Application 1983-2004
F flashing data list parameters 172 freeze data 101 fuel injector kill test 124 to 125 fuel system test 123 fuel system type 55
Index-248
View more...
Comments
